QC Industries

Product Catalog

LLC

Low profile conveyors

Driven by customers ... powered by proven products

Contents

125 Series Standard Conveyors
Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Gang Driving Automation Accessories

Page 116-117 8 9 10 11 20-21 22-25 26-27 28-29 30-37 38-40 41 42-43

125 Series Cleated Conveyors
Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Gang Driving Automation Accessories

Page 116-117 12 13 14 15 20-21 22-25 26-27 28-29 30-37 38-40 41 42-43

125 Series Magnetic Conveyors
Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Gang Driving Automation Accessories

Page 116-117 16 17 18 19 20-21 22-25 26-27 28-29 30-37 38-40 41 42-43

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Automation Accessories

Page 116-117 44 45 46 47 52-53 54-57 58 59 60-65 66 67

2

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Cleated Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Automation Accessories

Page 116-117 48 49 50 51 52-53 54-57 58 59 60-65 66 67

125 Z Series Angled Frame Conveyors
Application Assistance Form Z - Specifications & Dimensions Z - Features & Benefits L - Specifications & Dimensions L - Features & Benefits R - Specifications & Dimensions R - Features & Benefits U - Specifications & Dimensions U - Features & Benefits N - Specifications & Dimensions N - Features & Benefits Technical Data-How to Size & Order Guides, Flared Side Rails & Hoppers Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories

Page 118-119 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78-81 82-83 84-85 86-89 90-91

250 Series End & Center Drive Conveyors
Application Assistance Form End Drive Specifications & Dimensions End Drive Features & Benefits End Drive Technical Data End Drive How to Order Center Drive Specifications & Dimensions Center Drive Features & Benefits Center Drive Technical Data Center Drive How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Automation Accessories Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories

Page 120-121 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100-101 102-103 104 105 106-107 108-113 114-115

Additional Information
Page Learn about QC Industries Conveyor Selection Guide Warranty & Returned Goods Information 4-7 123 122

QC Industries

513.753.6000

3

Standing the Test of Time
Since 1981 companies from around the world have been relying on QC Industries for their conveyor needs. Our 55,000 square foot corporate headquarters, located in Cincinnati, Ohio, offers visitors a 2000 square foot display room filled with a full assortment of operating conveyors and interactive conveyor displays. Come visit us and get hands-on with your next conveyor project!

Special Orders: Our Specialty
If you're looking for something a little different than our standard conveyors, just contact us and we'll customize it for you. Whether it's a simple bracket to integrate with a customized piece of equipment, full assembly of a turnkey project, or a completely new conveyor design to make your application parameters work; give us a call. We stand ready to discuss your needs in detail.

Driven
One-Stop Shopping
We offer standard low profile conveyors that are less than 2 inches in their overall height. Our standard units range from 2 inches wide up to 24 inches wide and up to 25 feet in length. We offer a variety of styles including Standard Automation Conveyors, Cleated Belt Conveyors, Magnetic Conveyors, Corrosion Resistant Conveyors and five configurations of Angled Frame Conveyors. We also have a large selection of standard accessories to customize every conveyor including sides, guides, mounts, stands, motion detection and more...

Voice of the Customer
QC Industries is a Lean Manufacturing Company. In 2003 our company decided to go "Lean" and we intend to continue with our lean efforts into the future. From "Policy Deployment" to "Six Sigma Quality" to "Kaizen Events", we personify continual improvement. All of our products are designed based on the "Voice of the Customer", and our "5S Committee" is constantly ensuring that we are creating a self-disciplined and selfsustaining culture to build a stronger organization.

4

Lifetime Performance
As standard, our conveyors are constructed of high impact-resistant heavy duty 10 gauge steel; a framework that is laser cut and formed as one solid piece. This single-body frame design is cutting edge technology that ensures frame integrity and overall conveyor performance. Our conveyors are also designed to allow for bearing lubrication on the fly. This results in zero down time during regular maintenance, saving our customers both time and money. Belt tracking is designed into both ends of our conveyors for precision adjustments in the field. Our conveyors are built to last.

Application Spectrum
Packaging Workcell Assembly OEM Machine Integration Injection Molding Pharmaceutical Food Processing Labeling Bar Code Scanning High Heat & Hot Part Applications Metal Stamping Incline/Decline Operations Overhead Pick Off & Transfer Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Part Separation Clean Rooms

by

Customers
Worldwide Distribution Network
With representative organizations located throughout the U.S., Canada, Mexico, Europe & Australia, our extensive network of distributors and manufacturer’s representatives are ready to help you with all your conveyor needs. We have multiple representation in most localities to cover the variety of markets that we serve, enabling us to offer specialists within given industries. Give us a call on your next conveyor project and let us help you size up a winner.

State-of-the-Art Manufacturing
Great products are made on great equipment; and our products are made on the industry's finest equipment. From fully automated robotic lasers used to manufacture our fabricated components to high tech computer-controlled CNC machinery used to produce our machine components, we personify state-of-the-art manufacturing. We take pride in delivering quality in every product we produce.

5

Experienced Tech Support
We have experienced engineers ready right now to assist you with the most difficult of applications. We also pride ourselves on having highly trained inside sales representatives assigned to every customer, so we can provide individualized service from the beginning of the quote to post-shipping and follow up. If you need assistance in the field after the sale, we have factory service technicians that can be dispatched for travel directly to your site. We strive to exceed your expectations.

Superior Quality Assurance
Quality assurance and customer satisfaction are top priority at QC Industries. All of our conveyors are assembled and tested prior to leaving the factory. We adhere to a strict three-signature sign off system. The first step requires technicians to take ownership and personally sign off on orders they have filled; the next two tests and signatures are extra steps in ensuring that you receive exactly what you have ordered. We strive to get it right for you the first time.

Powered
24-Hour Quote Turnaround
In today's fast paced business world, when you need a quote, most often you need it fast. We pride ourselves on turning quotes around to our customers within 24 hours of receiving the application parameters. We recognize that time is money and to that end, we want to earn your respect. Give us a call and put us to the test ... you'll be glad you did.

World Class Delivery
Once you have sized your application and placed your order, the last thing you need to worry about is whether or not it will ship on time. At QC Industries we provide world class on-time delivery. We also institute continual improvement efforts focused at continuing to be the industry's best. Our flexible inventory system allows us to expedite orders when needed and ship conveyors same day if necessary. Once your order has shipped, your organization can receive a confirmation and tracking information to follow your order right to your dock door.

6

Computer-Aided Design
We offer CAD disks to help you lay out your applications quickly and precisely. We also offer CAD information online. If we are designing something special for your application, we can provide a full 3D model for “drop in” integration with your CAD package. We are continually striving to provide the necessary tools you need to succeed on your next conveyor project.

Innovative Design
A benchmark of the QC Industries design is an eccentric snap out sealed idler cartridge that allows single point belt tensioning and, therefore, the fastest belt change on the market. This belt change is normally achieved without ever having to remove or adjust our drive packages. We challenge you to find that in our competition. Our conveyors are also designed with a cutting edge crowned floating pulley system with thrust washers. This technology protects your bearings against offcenter loading, and controls belt misalignment that might otherwise result from camber.

by Proven

Products
A World-Class Company
We have built our reputation by combining innovative designs with high quality and exceptional service, earning the respect of end users and system integrators around the globe. Our extensive network of return customers powers us every day. Our customers become customers for life. Let us show you why.

Check Out Our Web Site
Go online to www.qcindustries.com and learn more about our organization. You will find links to all the products that QC Industries has available, many of which are not covered in this catalog. You will also find where we are exhibiting at trade shows, directions to our facility, and links to sign up for our QC Communicator newsletter; which offers insightful information into our products and applications. Information is available at your fingertips right now, so go for it!

7

125 Series Standard Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm

*See Technical Data on page 10

Overview Dimensions

.42

.75

6.13

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

1.89 *

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.75 .82 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH .88

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

8

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design, or hex through shaft design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

9

125 Series Standard Conveyors
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load. A conveyor application that is accumulating a 5-pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 10-A
500 450 400 350 300 Lbs. 250 200 150 150 50 100 75 75 50 37.5 3 4 100 200 125 150 175 87.5 250 300 225 450

1. Nominal Load

1.

100 50 25

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 10-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

0

2

6 8 Belt Width

10

12

18

24

Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 11

Pushing (Drive Location C&D)

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

2. Accumulation

2.
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 10-B
3.0 Equivalnt Load Constant 3.0 3.1

If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load from Line One times an accumulation factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 20 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane). Enter result on Line Two.

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

3.

2.5 2.5 2.0 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.0 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.0 0.0 0 5 0.6 1.1 1.6 2.3 2.1

2.6

2.8

2.9

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 10-B based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. Enter result on Line Three.

4. Side Seals

4.

If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent small parts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise, multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found on page 22. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factor of 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four. **Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 10-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

Angle Factor

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

STOP

Conveyor Friction - Figure 10-C
200 132 168

5. Conveyor Friction

5.
Equivalent Load

150 96 100 72 50 0 Conveyor Width Frictional Load 2 36 3 42 4 48 6 60 8 72 10 84 12 96 36 42 48 60 84

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 10-C. Enter result on Line Five.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)

lbs.

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotor for the conveyor. (See pages 30-37) Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

18 132

24 168

10

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Order

125 Series Standard

Step 1 Construction Frame Style Drive Type
3” 03

Step 2

Step 3 Drive Location Drive Pulley

Step 4

Tail Pulley

Length

Length

Length

Frame

Series 1 = 125

Widths 2” 02 4” 04 6” 06 8” 08 10” 10 12” 12 18” 18 24” 24

Drive Location C D
an St d d ar

Series
A

Width

Width

Belt Belt Belt

1 E S
Step 1

H

-

-

-

Drive Type E = End Drive

Construction S = Standard

Frame B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
Custom colors available - Contact factory

Frame Style H = Straight Frame

Step 2
Lengths* 24” 024 36” 036 48” 048 60” 060 72” 072 96” 096 120” 144” 120 144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3
Drive Pulley Type
Cap Solid Output Shaft Thru Hex Input 1/2” Dia* Dual Output 1/2” Hex 1/2” Dia*

Tail Pulley Type S
an St d d ar

Standard

Q R D

n io 41 pt g. Oep se

H D

n io 43 pt g. Oep se n io 42 pt g. Oep se

Rolling Nosebar

B
A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

Detectable

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4
Choose three-digit belt ordering code on pages 20-21. Example: 1ESBH02-048-ASQ-MAA 125 Series conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 2” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.
Optional: Snap-In Wiper is used with smooth surfaced, low friction belts for residue removal. This item snaps into the underside of the conveyor frame and can be installed at either end of the conveyor. Shown here on the drive end. To Order: Fill in the last two digits of the part number with the conveyor width Part Number: 125-0192-WW Example: 125-0192-08 Snap-In Wiper for an 8” wide conveyor As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Accessories such as Drives, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

Note: proceed to page 22 to continue sizing your conveyor...

QC Industries

513.753.6000

11

125 Series Cleated Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple Cleat Heights Available

*See Technical Data on page 14

Overview Dimensions

.42

.75

6.13

W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

W - 1.37 = CLEAT WIDTH 1.89 *

CLEAT HEIGHT SEE PAGE 51

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.82

L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH

.88

.75

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

12

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats

Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 15 Step 4 for options

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design, or hex through shaft design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

13

125 Series Cleated Conveyors
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load. A conveyor application that is carrying a 5-pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the three steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Lbs.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A
500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 25 50 150 100 75 75 50 37.5 3 4 100 200 125 150 175 87.5 250 300 225 450

1. Nominal Load

1.

0

2

6 8 Belt Width

10

12

18

24

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 14-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

Pushing (Drive Location C&D) Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 15 Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

2.

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 14-B
3.0 Equivalnt Load Constant 3.0 3.1

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Two. For inclining or declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 14-B based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. Enter result on Line Two.

2.5 2.5 2.0 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.0 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.0 0.0 0 5 0.6 1.1 1.6 2.3 2.1

2.6

2.8

2.9

STOP

**Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines One and Two together, please reference Figure 14-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Two. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

Angle Factor

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

3. Conveyor Friction

3.
Conveyor Friction - Figure 14-C
200 132 168

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 14-C. Enter result on Line Three.

150 Equivalent Load 96 100 72 50 0 Conveyor Width Frictional Load 2 36 3 42 4 48 6 60 8 72 10 84 12 96 36 42 48 60 84

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-3)

lbs.

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotor for the conveyor. (See pages 30-37) Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

18 132

24 168

14

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Order
Step 1 Construction
4” 04

Step 2 Frame Style

Step 3 Drive Location Drive Pulley

Step 4

Step 5 # of Cleats # of Cleats # of Cleats

Drive Type
3” 03

Tail Pulley

Length

Length

Length

Frame

Series 1 = 125

Widths 2” 02 6” 06 8” 08 10” 10 12” 12 18” 18 24” 24

C

A

Choose a base belt material and cleat height Base Belt Material MAA (Standard Urethane) UAC (White Urethane) 5mm CAB CBB 19mm CAD CBD 1/2” CAE CBE 3/4” CAF CBF 1” w/corr. sides CAH CBH 1” CAG CBG 2” CAI CBI 3” CAK CBK

Note 1: All belts must have a cleat indent of width minus 1.37”, except 1” cleats with corrugated sidewall. That cleat indent is width minus 3.62” Note 2: Cleated belts are intended for use in conjunction with indented or adjustable guides (see page 23)

Determine the total number of cleats on the conveyor. Multiply conveyor length (in inches) by 2, divide by the desired spacing between the cleats (in inches). This will result in the total number of cleats evenly spaced around the circumference of the belt. Note: Must have a whole number of cleats. Example: 1ESBH06-048-ASQ-CAE016 125 Series conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 6” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor belt has a 1/2” high cleat every 6”.

Series

Width

Width

Belt Belt Belt

1 E S

H
Step 1

-

-

-

Drive Type E = End Drive

Construction S = Standard

Frame B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
Custom colors available - Contact factory

Frame Style H = Straight Frame

Step 2
Lengths* 24” 024 36” 036 48” 048 60” 060 72” 072 96” 096 120” 144” 120 144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3
Drive Location D
an St d d ar

Drive Pulley Type
Cap Solid Output Shaft Thru Hex Input 1/2” Dia* Dual Output 1/2” Hex 1/2” Dia*

Tail Pulley Type S
an St d d ar

Standard

Q D

n io 41 pt g. Oep se

H D

n io 42 pt g. Oep se

Detectable

B
A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4

Step 5

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Accessories such as Drives, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details. Note: proceed to page 22 to continue sizing your conveyor...

QC Industries

513.753.6000

15

125 Series Magnetic Conveyors
Specifications

• • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm

*See Technical Data on page 18

Overview Dimensions

2.69 NO MAGNETS .42

NO MAGNETS 4.00

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

W + 2.33

MAGNET SPACING SEE PAGE 19 1.89 *

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.82

L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH

.88

.75

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

16

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Ceramic magnets are custom positioned within the conveyor framework to achieve an optimum magnetic field and smooth product movement for your application • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design, or hex through shaft design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

17

125 Series Magnetic Conveyors
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load.
Lbs.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A
500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 25 50 150 100 75 75 50 37.5 3 4 100 200 125 150 250 300 225 175 87.5 450

A conveyor application that is carrying a 5-pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

2

6 8 Belt Width

10

12

18

24

1. Nominal Load

1.

Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 19

Pushing (Drive Location C&D)

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) metal parts weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 18-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

Magnetic Load Factors - Figure 18-B
0.80 0.74

Equivalent Load Constant

2. Magnetic Factor

2.

0.60 0.46 0.40 0.30 0.23 0.20 0.08 0.01 0.00 1 2 3 4 5 6 Number of Magnet Rows 7 8 0.16 0.39

To achieve magnetic pull, there are rows of magnets down the length of the conveyor. The maximum number of rows can be determined by dividing the conveyor width by two (not to exceed eight rows). Choose the number of magnet rows and then multiply the load by the factor from Figure 18-B. Enter result on Line Two.

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

3.

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 18-C based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. Enter result on Line Three.

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 18-C
3.0 Equivalnt Load Constant 2.5 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.0 Angle Factor 0.0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 0.6 1.4 1.1 1.8 1.6 2.3 2.1 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

4. Side Seals

4.

If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent small parts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise, multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found on page 22. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factor of 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four. **Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 18-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

STOP

5. Conveyor Friction

5.

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 18-D. Enter result on Line Five.

Conveyor Friction - Figure 18-D
200 132 168

150

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)

lbs.

Equivalent Load

96 100 72 50 36 42 48 60 84

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotor for the conveyor. (See pages 30-37) Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

0 Conveyor Width Frictional Load 2 36 3 42 4 48 6 60 8 72 10 84 12 96 18 132 24 168

18

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Order
Step 1 Construction Frame Style Drive Type
3” 03

Step 2

Step 3 Drive Location Drive Pulley Tail Pulley

Step 4
Number of rows

Step 5
6” Sections on Row 6” Section from Tail Row Spacing

Length

Length

Length

Frame

Series 1 = 125

Widths 2” 02 4” 04 6” 06 8” 08 10” 10 12” 12 18” 18 24” 24

C

A

Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 20 and 21.

Please send the part to be conveyed to our Sales Department to evaluate for proper magnetic arrangement. Ceramic magnets are positioned in a stainless steel frame according to each application. This permits a wide variety of magnetic field strengths and location options. Our application specialists will complete the part number for you. Below is an illustration of how we document the magnet spacing.

1 Number of rows

Series

Width

Width

Belt Belt Belt

1 E M E H
Step 1
Drive Type E = End Drive

-

-

-

-

See Step 5 below
Consult factory

Construction M = Magnetic

Frame E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

Frame Style H = Straight Frame

Step 2
Lengths* 24” 024 36” 036 48” 048 60” 060 72” 072 96” 096 120” 144” 120 144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3
Drive Location D
an St da rd

Drive Pulley Type
Cap Solid Output Shaft Thru Hex Input 1/2” Dia* Dual Output 1/2” Hex 1/2” Dia*

Tail Pulley Type S
an St r da d

Standard

Q D

n io 41 pt g. Oep se

H D

n io 42 pt g. Oep se

Detectable

B
A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4

Step 5

3 Number of magnet sections from tail

2 Distance from tail before magnetic field begins 4

Row Spacing

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Accessories such as Drives, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

Note: proceed to page 22 to continue sizing your conveyor...

QC Industries

513.753.6000

19

125 Series Conveyors
Top si of F de Coef ricti on ( ficient CoF ) Sho r Max t Term P Tem a pera rt ture Max (°F) . Tem Ambien t pera ture Operati ng (°F) Anti -Sta tic Ave ra Thic ge Bel t knes s (in ches )
LOW LOW LOW LOW HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW 212 212 212 212 212 212 212 194 212 212 248 140 175 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 158 176 176 212 140 175 YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES YES YES NO YES YES 0.075 0.075 0.075 0.075 0.103 0.145 0.072 0.083 0.185 0.054 0.051 0.060 0.054 MED LOW MED MED MED LOW LOW HIGH MED 356 356 400 300 300 230 212 248 176 356 356 350 212 212 194 176 212 176 YES YES NO YES YES YES YES YES YES 0.059 0.051 0.085 0.079 0.067 0.060 0.075 0.083 0.100 LOW LOW LOW MED HIGH MED HIGH LOW MED VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW 212 212 230 248 176 212 212 158 176 175 248 176 176 176 194 212 176 176 212 158 176 175 212 176 YES YES YES YES YES 104e 104e 105e 105e NO NO NO 0.075 0.075 0.061 0.047 0.050 0.063 0.080 0.040 0.100 0.023 0.024 0.040 0.060 0.050 0.075 0.063 0.071 0.070 0.067 0.072 0.098 0.072 0.059 0.059 0.090 0.040 0.177 0.210 0.106 0.078 0.175 MED LOW MED MED MED MED MED MED MED HIGH LOW MED MED LOW HIGH HIGH MED MED HIGH 158 176 212 212 212 175 175 175 302 212 194 356 176 176 212 225 212 212 175 158 176 176 176 176 175 175 175 248 176 158 356 176 176 176 225 176 176 175 YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES NO YES NO NO YES YES

ptio n

Belt Orde ring Cod e

scri

e De

Top Surf ac

Top Surf ac

e Ma

teria

l

Multi-Purpose Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard Urethane C. Option #2-Spill Edge Cleat D. Option #3-Perforated Belt High Friction Belts A. Grey Diamond Top High Adhesion B. Green High Tack PVC C. Beige FDA High Adhesion D. Black Lateral Grooved High Adhesion E. Black Rough Top High Adhesion Accumulation Belts (Low Friction) A. White FDA Fabric Accumulator C. Black Tight Weave Accumulator D. Grey Textured Urethane Accumulator E. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator Heat-Resistant Belts A. White Silicone Heat Resistor B. White Silicone Translucent Resistor C. Smooth White FDA Silicone Heat Resistor D. Blue Nitrile Heat Resistor E. White Nitrile Heat Resistor Cut Resistant Belts A. Yellow Cut Resistor B. Standard Urethane C. Black Dimple Top Cut Resistor D. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor FDA Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Sealed Edge Standard Urethane C. Pure White FDA D. Woven White FDA E. White FDA Urethane High Adhesion Static Conductive Belts A. Textured Carbon Impregnated B. Accumulation Static Conductive C. Low Friction Static Conductive D. Structured Static Conductive Translucent Belts A. Green Translucent Accumulator B. FDA Fabric Translucent Accumulator C. Silicone Translucent Accumulator Color Contrasting Belts A. Gray Textured Contraster B. Smooth Green Urethane Contraster C. Dark Green PVC Contraster D. Light Blue Urethane Contraster E. Smooth Black PVC Contraster Non-Marking Belts A. Felt Topped Product Protector B. Fabric Topped Product Protector C. Cotton Topped Product Protector D. Black Elastomer Product Protector Release Properties Belts A. Beige Silicone Product Release B. White PVC Product Release C. Textured Silicone Product Release D. Smooth Habilene Product Release E. Smooth Silicone Product Release Specialty/Profile Belts A. Green Sawtooth Profile Belt B. White Grooved Rubber C. Stipple Top PVC Profile D. Negative Pyramid Profile E. Green Longitudinal PVC Profile Belt

MAA Smooth MAB Smooth, Sealed Edge MAC Longitudinal Serrated Cleat MAD Smooth, Perforations FAA FAB FAC FAD FAF AAA AAC AAD AAE Snakeskin Matte Smooth Longitudinal Groove Rough Top Fabric Fabric Textured Fabric

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane PVC PVC Soft Silicone PVC PVC Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated

White White White White Light Grey Dark Green Beige Black Black White Black Light Grey Dark Green

YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO NO YES NO NO YES

HAA HAB HAC HAD HAE IAA IAB IAC IAD

Fine Texture Fabric Smooth Coarse Structure Smooth Smooth Smooth Dimple Top Structured

Silicone Silicone Impregnated Silicone Nitrile Rubber Nitrile Rubber Urethane Urethane Hard Urethane Nitrile Rubber

White White White Blue White Yellow White Black Black

NO NO YES NO NO NO YES NO NO

UAA UAB UAC UAD UAE EAA EAB EAC EAD TAA TAB TAC

Smooth Smooth, Sealed Edge Matte Smooth Smooth Textured Rough Texture Smooth Structured Textured Fabric Textured Textured Smooth Matte Matte Smooth Felt Fabric Fabric Felt Smooth Matte, Smooth Fine Texture Smooth Textured Sawtooth Lateral Groove Stipple Top Textured Longitudinal Groove

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Urethane Impregnated Nitrile Rubber Urethane NBR Impregnated Fleece Impregnated PU Urethane Impregnated Silicone

White White White Translucent White Black Black Black Black Light Green Translucent Translucent

YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES

PAA PAB PAC PAD PAE NAA NAB NAC NAD RAA RAB RAC RAD RAE SAA SAB SAC SAD SAE

PVC Urethane PVC Urethane PVC Felt Spun Polyester Cotton Polyester Silicone Non-Stick PVC Silicone Habilene Silicone PVC Nitrile Rubber PVC Urethane PVC

Grey Green Dark Green Light Blue Black

NO YES NO YES NO

White YES White YES Natural White YES Black NO Beige White White White White Green White White White Green YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES YES NO

Chemical Resistant Belts Due to the broad spectrum of chemicals and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in chemical application circumstances. Our application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand the chemicals present as well as the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach delivers the best possible product for the application.

20

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Specifications subject to change - consult factory

FDA

Belt Selection Guide

Belt Colo r

QC Industries offers conveyor belting for a wide variety of applications and industries. These pages cover a number of the more popular belts we have provided through the years. These belts have all been tested at QC Industries and offer a compatible fit to the 125 Series conveyors. If you have a specific need that is not covered on these pages, please
Multi-Purpose Belts

contact one of our sales engineers directly at the factory to discuss your application parameters. To Order With Conveyor: Please use the three-digit QC belt code number for conveyor ordering on pages 11, 15, and 19.

To Order Belt Only: Choose nominal conveyor width and length in inches and enter the three-digit belt code. 1E - WW - LLL Example: 1E-08-120-MAA Standard urethane belt for an 8” wide by 120” long 125 Series conveyor

M

AA

QUICK SHIP!

M

AB

M

AC

M

AD

High-Friction Belts

A FA

B FA

C FA

D FA

F FA

Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)

AA

A

AA

C

AA

D

AA

E

Heat-Resistant Belts

HA

A

HA

B

HA

C

HA

D

HA

E

Cut-Resistant Belts

IA

A

IA

B

IA

C

IA

D

FDA/USDA Belts

UA

A

UA

B

UA

C

UA

D

UA

E

Static Conductive Belts

EA

A

EA

B

EA

C

EA

D

Translucent Belts

A TA
Color Contrasting Belts

B TA

C TA

A PA

B PA

C PA

D PA

E PA

Non-Marking Belts

NA

A

NA

B

NA

C

NA

D

Release Properties Belts

RA

A

RA

B

RA

C

RA

D

RA

E

Specialty/Profile Belts

SA

A

SA

B

SA

C

SA

D

SA

E

Chemical Resistant Belts Due to the wide variety of chemical and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in these application circumstances. Our application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand not only the chemicals present, but the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach delivers the best possible product for the application.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

21

125 Series Side Rails & Guide Rails
Fixed Side Rails
W + 1.06 W + 1.06 W + .06 .33 * .33 * W - .61 W + 1.06 W - .19 .46 *

2.22

2.22

2.35

1/3” Side Rails
125-0169 pictured

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Part No. 125-0153-

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with seals** Part No. 125-0169To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0169-096

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125-0170To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0170-024

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0153-048

W + 1.19 W + .06 .93 * .78

W + 1.19 W + .06 W - .61 .93 * .78

W + 1.19 W - .19 1.03 * .88

2.81 2.03 2.03

2.81

2.91 2.03

1” Side Rails
125-0178 pictured

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Part No. 125-0174To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0174-048

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with seals** Part No. 125-0177To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0177-024

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125-0178To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0178-096

W + 1.19 W + .06

W + 1.19 W + .06 W - .61

W + 1.19 W - .18

1.93 *

1.78 3.81 2.03

1.93 *

1.78 3.81 2.03

2.05 *

1.90 3.93 2.03

2” Side Rails
125-0215 pictured

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides Part No. 125-0215To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0215-024

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with seals** Part No. 125-0217To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0217-036

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125-0216To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0216-060

Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see page 20 Note 2: All rails are sold in sets ** Side seals are not intended for cleated belts, high friction belts, or belt speeds exceeding 30 FPM Note 3: Side rails start 1 11/16” from tail end and stop 3 1/2” from drive end Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory

22

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Adjustable Guide Rails
W - .10 MAX. 2.50 MAX. * 1.13 MIN. * W - .25 MAX.

3.00 ADJ.

3.00 ADJ.

3.25 MAX. * 1.99 MIN. * 4.34

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX. 1” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125-0281W -.38 MAX.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX 2” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125-0282-

2-Axis Adjustable Guides
125-0281-048-T pictured

3.00 ADJ.

5.25 MAX. * 3.00 MIN. * 4.34

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal length of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or a thumb wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for set screw and (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number. Example 125-0281-120 -T 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheel adjustment for a 120” long conveyor. The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the product being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and horizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility. Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The thumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal for quick adjustments, because no tools are required.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX. 3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125-0283-

W + 1.57 W + 1.42 W - 1.21 W - 1.21

2.40 MAX. * 2.13 MIN. * 1.62 MAX. * 1.03 MIN. * 3.28 3.94

Indented Guides
125-0219 pictured

1” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 125-0219-

2” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 125-0218-

W + 1.57 W - 1.31 To Order: Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. 3.03 * 4.92 Example 125-0219-120 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long conveyor. The Indented Guides are designed to work with cleated belts. Each cleated belt is indented slightly (see page 15). The Indented Guide spans the indentation, providing a pocket which surrounds the product being conveyed. 3” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 125-0222*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

23

125 Series Side Rails & Guide Rails
Tee Slotted Extrusions
10-32 UNF THRU .25 To Order: Use part number 125-0074-035 (Qty. 1) 125-0074-035-SET (Qty. 4) The Rotate-In Tee Nut is designed to hold lightweight brackets that have a thickness of .148” or under The Rotate-In Tee Nut can be used with the following rails and bolt on profiles: 1” - 125-0174, 125-0177, 125-0178 2” - 125-0215, 125-0217, 125-0216 Tee - 125-0225, 125-0199

.19 .86

Rotate-In Tee Nut

Rotate-In Tee Nut Part No. 125-0074-035 (Qty 1) Part No. 125-0074-035-SET (Qty 4) Note: The Rotate-In Tee Nut works with the 1” and 2” side rails shown on page 22, as well as the Single Tee Slot and the Multi Tee Slot extrusions shown below.

W + 2.68 W + 1.50

W + 1.28

.73 *

.73 *

1.16 Multi Tee Slot Side Assembly Part No. 125-0225To Order: Fill in last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Part number includes one set as shown in drawing.

1.16 Single Tee Slot Side Assembly Part No. 125-0199To Order: Fill in last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Part number includes one set as shown in drawing.

Multi Tee Slot

Single Tee Slot

Product Containment Accessories
W + 3.25 MAX. W + 1.50 MIN. LANES W - .61 .33 * RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3" RAILS 3.86 MAX. 3.29 MIN.

W + 1.56

Lane Dividers

Lane Dividers For part number see below

Hinged Side Extenders
Shown with 1/3” side rail with seal

Hinged Side Extenders For part number see below

To Order: LD

S
Construction (S - Standard) Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot) # of Lanes (2,3,4 etc) # of Rails (1, 2, 3 etc) Conveyor Length (in inches) Conveyor Width (in inches) Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)

To Order: Hinged Side Extenders bolt directly onto the frame of the conveyor, and can be used in conjunction with 1/3” side rails. Note: Only available in 24” and 36” lengths. To obtain a longer length of hinged side, please use combinations of 24” and 36” lengths. 36” Long Part No. 125-1003-036 However, all length combinations must equal 24” Long Part No. 125-1003-024 12” less than the nominal conveyor length. *Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

Example LD-2-08144-12FS 2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long conveyor. One rail with two lanes mounted to the conveyor frame

24

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Flared Side Rails
Flared Side Rails are ideal for applications that require a “drop zone” wider than the width of the conveyor. The rails attach to and require the use of the adjustable guide rails shown at the top of page 23. Additionally, the user can add other components (shown below) to help guide the product as needed. Note: Flared Side Rails should be ordered one size smaller than the nominal length of the conveyor. To Order: Z-1004-012 Z-1004-018 Z-1004-024 Z-1004-030 Z-1004-036 Z-1004-042 Z-1004-048 12” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” length length length length length length length

W + 10.35 MAX. W + 4.41 MIN. 45° W + 4.97 MAX. W - .97 MIN.

4.00

Flared Side Rails
L .25

Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide (sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL-S

5.74 MAX. * 4.93 MIN. *

Example: (1) Z-1004-036 A set of 36” long flared side rails The rails are sold in sets and include mounting hardware Note: Requires Part #125-0282-LLL-S shown on page 23

L = length of flared side rails

2.90 .90

End Stops are used in conjunction with the Flared Side Rail. Stops are adjustable down the length of the rail. Note: End stops are available for the following width conveyors: 8”, 10”, 12”, 18”, and 24”. To Order: 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” 125-0234-08 125-0234-10 125-0234-12 125-0234-18 125-0234-24

2.35 *

End Stops
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL-S, #Z-1004-LLL

Example: (1) 125-0234-10 One end stop for a 10” wide conveyor equipped with flared side rails Note: Designed to be compatible with 1” and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with a swing gate to help contain product

L L - 4.20 MAX. L - 5.80 MAX.

The Adjustable Hopper is used in conjunction with the Flared Side Rail. The hopper is made from (2) end stops, which are adjustable down the length of the rail. Available for the following width conveyors: 8”, 10” 12” 18”, and 24”. To Order: Please order a quantity of 2: 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” 125-0234-08 125-0234-10 125-0234-12 125-0234-18 125-0234-24

2.35 *

Adjustable Hopper
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL

Example: (2) 125-0234-10 Two end stops for a 10” wide conveyor equipped with flared side rails L = length of flared side rails Note: Designed to be compatible with 1” and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with a swing gate to help contain product

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

25

125 Series Mounts
Standard Mounts
.22 DIA. .41 1.15 1.32 .13 .38 SLOT 3.50 .31 .34 DIA. .59 .88 1.32 .135 1.25 W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71 3.06 2.06 * W + 1.46 To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”. The Tee Slot mounted version attaches to 1” side rails, 2” side rails, the single tee slot and the multi tee slot. See page 22 & 24. Part No. 125-0181-01 (Tee Slot)* Part No. 125-0181-04 (Frame)* Part No. 125-0181-05 (For use with multi-tier stand)*
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Universal Adjustable Side Mount
125-0181-04 pictured

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Frame mounted brackets can only be used with 1” high or lower cleats. Tee Slot mounted brackets can only be used with 1/2” high or lower cleats.
W + 1.46

.22 DIA. 1.53 .13 3.10

.34 DIA. .59 .88 .31 3.07 4.81

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.
5.28 *
1.25

The Tee Slot mounted version attaches to 1” side rails, 2” side rails, the single tee slot and the multi tee slot. See page 22 & 24. Part No. 125-0182-01 (Tee Slot)* Part No. 125-0182-04 (Frame)*
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Universal Raised Side Mount
125-0182-04 pictured

.38 SLOT 3.50

.135

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Universal raised side mounts work with all cleat heights.

.22 .66

1.00

5/16 DIA. THRU HOLE To Order:

1.60 .135 3.00 1.56 W + 1.37 W + 2.00

2.04 * Attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”. Part No. 125-0010-00*

Tee Mount

4.00

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Can also be used at tail end of conveyor in conjunction with drive end mounts (125-0014-00, 125-0013-00, and 125-0015-00). Cannot be used with cleated belts. 11/32 DIA.

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

.63

5/16-18 SET SCREW .257 DIA. THRU HOLE

2.89 * .43 W - 1.50 W - .75 W + 1.00

1.25 .16

.84

To Order: Attaches directly to the underside of the conveyor frame. To order, use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits. Part No. 125-0011-WW * Example: 125-0011-04* Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wide conveyor
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Universal Bottom Mount

W + 1.50

Notes: Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface. Cannot be used with high adhesion or cleated belts.
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

26

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Standard Mounts
.93 * To Order: This mount uses existing through holes on the conveyor that are located 6.06” from the tail end and 8.5” or 14.5” from the drive end, depending on which gearmotor selection is chosen. This will mount the conveyor to a flat surface. To order, use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits. Part No. 125-0116-WW* Example: 125-0116-06* Rod Clamp Mount for 6” wider conveyor
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Standard method for mounting to stands (fasteners included)

.63 3/8-16 CAP SCREW 5/16-18 CAP SCREW .63

.38

W + 1.00 W + 1.75

Rod Clamp Mount

Alternate method for mounting (fasteners not included)

.93 *

Notes: Mounts cannot be used with Multi Tee or Single Tee Slotted Side Assembly. Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.

To Order: 3.38 1.00 .63 W + 1.75
These mounts are primarily intended to provide precise alignment when mounted to a common flat surface, or for multiple conveyors utilizing a common drive shaft. See gang drive page 41.

1.34 9/32 DIA. THRU

2.00

TYPE LEFT HAND RIGHT HAND UNIVERSAL*

PART NO. 125-0014-00 125-0013-00 125-0015-00

Drive End Mount

1.41 2.06

W + 1.13

*This mount replaces either right hand or left hand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.

Notes: Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive. Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.

To Order: 3.38 .94 .63 W + 1.75
For applications where rapid alignment and rigid mounting of conveyors is required. These clamp mounts provide an economical and practical approach to rapid bolster mounting of gang driven conveyors. See gang drives pg. 41.

1.34

2.75

2.70 MAX.

TYPE LEFT HAND RIGHT HAND UNIVERSAL*

PART NO. 125-0103-BL 125-0102-BR 125-0117-BU

Self-Aligning Bottom Clamp Mount

BRACKET BY CUSTOMER 3/8 MAX. THICKNESS Notes: Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive. Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.

*This mount replaces either right hand or left hand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.

BRACKET BY CUSTOMER 3/8 MAX. THICKNESS

1.34

2.75

2.70 MAX.

To Order: For applications where rapid alignment and rigid mounting of conveyors is required. These clamp mounts are ideal for quick die change systems since the conveyors can be installed into the dies prior to being inserted into the press. See gang drives pg. 41.

TYPE .94 .63 W + 1.75 LEFT HAND RIGHT HAND UNIVERSAL* Notes: Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive. Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.

PART NO. 125-0102-TL 125-0103-TR 125-0117-TU

Self-Aligning Top Clamp Mount

3.38

*This mount replaces either right hand or left hand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

27

125 Series Stands
NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet

Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
WW H1 - H2 06 - 09 09 - 12 12 - 15 15 - 18 18 - 21 21 - 24 24 - 27 27 - 30 30 - 33 H1 - H2 33 - 36 36 - 39 39 - 42 42 - 45 45 - 48 48 - 51 51 - 54 54 - 57 57 - 60

To order: H1 Part No. 0182 H2 WW

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter conveyor width into WW section. NOTE: No additional mounts are required. NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand framework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimum height range is 12 - 15 inches Example: 0182 - 30 - 33 - 24 (Part No. includes one stand)

H1 - H2

Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches)
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24

Steel Telescoping Conveyor Stands To order:
WW

H1 -

H2 -

WW

Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
H1 - H2 16 - 24 23 - 36 35 - 48 47 - 60

Part No. 0184 -

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter top plate width into WW section. NOTE: Mounts are required to attach the conveyor to the stand. See mount pages 26 & 27 for details NOTE: 8” wide top plate will accept up to a 6” wide conveyor 14” wide top plate will accept up to a 12” wide conveyor 21” wide top plate will accept up to an 18” wide conveyor 27” wide top plate will accept up to a 24” wide conveyor Example: 0184 - 16 - 24 - 14 (Part No. includes one stand)

H1 - H2

Top Plate Widths - WW (in inches)
08 14 21 27

Steel Stands with Stabilizers
WW

To order:
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
H1 - H2 18 - 26 25 - 38 37 - 50 49 - 62

H1 0186 -

H2 -

WW

Part No.

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter top plate width into WW section. NOTE: Must use Rod Clamp Mount 125-0016-WW (See page 27) to attach the conveyor to the stand. NOTE: 8” wide top plate will accept up to a 6” wide conveyor 14” wide top plate will accept up to a 12” wide conveyor 21” wide top plate will accept up to an 18” wide conveyor 27” wide top plate will accept up to a 24” wide conveyor Example: 0186 - 16 - 24 - 21 (Part No. includes one stand)

H1- H2

Top Plate Widths - WW (in inches)

48”

08

14

21

27

Note: Max conveyor length is 60”

Aluminum Multiple Conveyor Stands
WW

To order:
H1 - H2 (in inches)
27 33 39 45 51 57 30 36 42 48 54 60

H1 -

H2 -

WW

Part No. 0187 -

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. 2) Choose stand width (WW) and enter into WW section. NOTE: Conveyor will add 1.89” to top of belt height NOTE: Adjustable side mounts are required to attach the conveyors to the stand. Use Part No. 125-0181-05 NOTE: *Stand width must be at least 4” greater than the width of the top tier conveyor and/or at least 8” greater than the width of the bottom tier conveyor NOTE: Bottom conveyors can be adjusted within 5” from the floor to within 8” of the top conveyor Example: 0187 - 33 - 36 - 12 (Part No. includes one stand)

H1- H2

Widths - WW* (in inches) Stand Widths - WW (in inches)
12 18 24 30

36

NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, the functionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.

28

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Angle Brace

To order: Part No. 125-0189-00 For use with aluminum stands only. Angle brace can be used on a 125 Series conveyor with a minimum top of belt height of 28”. The angle brace is designed for conveyors 5’ or longer. When used with casters, angle braces must be used on both stands. Part number denotes a set; order (1) per stand.

Aluminum Cross Ties

To order: Cross Ties - Available Lengths LLL Inches
24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144” 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144

Part No. 125 - 0235 -

LLL

Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties. Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to length because of stand placement variations. Example: 125-0235-120

Steel Cross Ties

To order: Cross Ties - Available Lengths LLL Inches
24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144” 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144

Part No. 125 - 0236 -

LLL

Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties. Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to length because of stand placement variations. Example: 125-0236-036

Casters To order: Part No. 125-0122-04 Swivel locking caster Order (2) per stand Casters can be added to either aluminum or steel stands. Swivel locking casters increase stand height by 5.50”. Casters should only be used with stands that are 1/3 as wide as they are tall.

Swivel-In Tee Nut To order: Part No. 125-0074-036 (Qty 1) 125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4) The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal for mounting brackets to an aluminum stand, and allows quick mounting location changes. 1/4 - 20 thread in Tee-Nut is provided for attaching accessories

NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, the functionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

29

125 Series Drives
Drive Sizing Technical Data
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 10, 14, and 18). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute) and service factor (determined below). The steps below guide the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)

1.

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from pages 10, 14, or 18). Divide this number by 6. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT)
Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages (33 or 37), and write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use either a timing belt or a chain. For heavy duty drives (listed on page 37), the drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.

2.

3. Select Service Class and Enter Service Factor (SF)
Select a service class:

Service Class (I or II)

3.

Class I - Moderate loads with chain and sprocket or direct drive Class II - Moderate loads with timing belt and pulley Now select the service factor (SF) from Chart 30-A below based upon hours of operation per day and number of starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.

4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT)
Divide the drive train torque (DTT) from #2 by the service factor (SF) from #3. This result equals the supplied drive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.

4.

Service Factor - Chart 30-A 5. Determine Functionality
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque [SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque [RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT > RCDT. If not, then: A) Slow down the belt speed B) Choose a wider conveyor C) Consult factory
Service Factor Hours of Operation per Day 24 2 16 8 2.3 2.2 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.8 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Class II

Class I

Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to use the remaining drive pages.

1.7 1.4 1.0 1.2 Starts and Stops per Hour

Example: Equivalent load = 100 (per conveyor technical data page) 100 / 6 = 17 (RCDT) 30 FPM (From page 33 - standard duty top drive - fixed speed) 33 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a top drive) 8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5) 33 / 1.5 = 22 inch lbs. (SDTT) RCDT = 17 SDTT = 22 20 17 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

Example: Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page) 300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT) 50 FPM (From page 37 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed) 87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7) 87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT) RCDT = 50.0 SDTT = 51.1 51.1 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

30

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner. Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.

Mounting Arrangement

Drawings

Drive locations

Sizing information

Voltage

Step 3
125 Series Standard Duty Drives
Standard Duty Electric

Step 1: Step 5
Side or Remote Drive
Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S3SE Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1Mounting S or R S or R S or R S or R S or R S or R Position* 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 Suffix SESESESESESE-

Side Drive
A 2.50 3.54 .50 5.57 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and gearmotor ordering 1 3 information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Fixed Speed Sizing Information
FPM 4.5 10 18 21 30 43
Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

Choose mounting arrangement & location

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025 Prefix 05 05 05 05 05 05 Voltage 111111Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information*
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 *A 6.47

88 76 50 41 33 23

125 Series

6.47 6.47 6.47 5.89 5.89
*A from drawing

3.50 4.00

.84

.16

.38

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Top View

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

1

3 Variable Speed

Step 1

Remote Drive
3.08 A 1.26 O .28 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 3 1 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Step 2:
If top or bottom drive mounting arrangement, choose timing belt or chain drive
Note: Each speed has two rows. The top row is timing belt driven, and the bottom row is chain driven

Sizing Information
FPM* 2.5 - 5.0 6.0 - 12.0 10 - 20 12 - 24 17 - 34 24.5 - 49
Torque (DTT) inch Lbs.

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-R1SE Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1Mounting S or R S or R S or R S or R S or R S or R Position* 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 Suffix SESESESESESE-

Motor Part Number
Example: 05V-018 Prefix 16 16 16 25 25 33 Voltage V V V V V V Ratio 50 40 30 20 15 10 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 1 1 1 1 1 1 A* 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16
*A from drawing

77 40 27 22 17 12

4.88 5.57 4.25 .27 1.31

4.00

2.00 .75 3.50

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Top View

1

3

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SE (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 051-120 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@4.5 FPM)

Top or Bottom Drive
Top Drive
A + .31 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the right for mounting package 1 3 and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Fixed Speed Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 11 18 22 30 44 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 88 (belt) 88(chain) 76 (belt) 76 (chain) 50 (belt) 50 (chain) 41 (belt) 41 (chain) 33 (belt) 33 (chain) 23 (belt) 23 (chain)

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt M1M1M1M1M1M1T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 SESESESESESE5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025 Ratio Prefix Voltage 05 05 05 05 05 05 111111120 050 030 025 018 012 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information*
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 *A 6.47 6.47 6.47 6.47 5.79 5.79
*A from drawing

3.50 9.50 3.39 3.50 5.61

.38 1.75

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Top View

1

3

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Variable Speed

Bottom Drive
.33 1.75 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Sizing Information
FPM* 2.5 - 5.0 6.0 - 12.0 10 - 20 12 - 24 17 - 34 24.5 - 49
Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M1CH 10 10 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M110 CH 10 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M110 CH 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SET or B M110 CH 10 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M110 CH 10 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M1CH 10 10
*See Drive Location Chart

Motor Part Number
Example: 05V-012 Ratio Prefix Voltage 05 05 05 05 05 05 VVVVVV120 050 030 025 018 012 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information*
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 1 1 1 1 1 1 *A 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 6.45 6.45
*A from drawing

9.50

3.25 3.50 .38 A

5.61

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Top View

77 77 40 40 27 27 22 22 17 17 12 12

(belt) (chain) (belt) (chain) (belt) (chain) (belt) (chain) (belt) (chain) (belt) (chain)

Step 3:
Choose speed

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

1

3
Notes:

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SE-5M2525 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 05V-050 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@6.0 TO 12.0 FPM) See Drive Accessory Page for optional cords, switches, and plugs

32

QC Industries

513.753.6000

1. Speeds can be reduced to 1/10 of their stated speed and provides 88 inch lbs. of torque by using a decimal reducer (Part No. 125-0205-10x) 2. Above gearmotors are not UL, CSA, or CE approved 3. Torque values are based upon start-up torque

QC Industries

513.753.6000

33

Step 4: Step 4
Speed Mounting Voltage (p. 30) Run drive sizing calculations listed on Page 30

Step 5:
Fixed Speed Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 11 18 22 30 44 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 88 (belt) 88(chain) 76 (belt) 76 (chain) 50 (belt) 50 (chain) 41 (belt) 41 (chain) 33 (belt) 33 (chain) 23 (belt) 23 (chain)

Step 6
Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt M1M1M1M1M1M1T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 SESESESESESE5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025 Ratio Prefix Voltage 05 05 05 05 05 05 111111120 050 030 025 018 012 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information*
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 *A 6.47 6.47 6.47 6.47 5.79 5.79
*A from drawing

Choose voltage requirements

Step 6:
Put together two part numbers, drive mounting package and gearmotor, by following from left to right

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Variable Speed

Step 2

Torque

Gear Reducer Sprocket/Timing Pulley Combinations

Horsepower
1 3 V D

Voltage Key
115VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller

QC Industries

513.753.6000

31

125 Series Standard Duty Drives

Side Drive
Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and gearmotor ordering 1 3 information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

A*

2.56 .50 5.57

3.54

3.50 4.00

.84

.16

.38

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page

1

3

Remote Drive
3.08 A* 1.26 .28 DIA. Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 3 1 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

4.88 5.57 4.25 .27 1.31

4.00

2.00 .75 3.50

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page

Top View

1

3

Top Drive
A + .31 * 3.50 9.50 3.39 ** 3.50 5.61 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the right for mounting package 1 3 and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

.38 1.75

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page **Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21

Top View

1

3

Bottom Drive
.33 1.75 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

9.50

3.00 5.61 3.50 3.50 .38 A + .31 *

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page

Top View

1

3

32

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Standard Duty Electric

Side or Remote Drive
Fixed Speed Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43
Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S3SE Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1Mounting S or R S or R S or R S or R S or R S or R Position* 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 Suffix SE SE SE SE SE SE

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025 Prefix 05 05 05 05 05 05 Voltage 111111Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information*
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 *A 6.47 6.47 6.47 6.47 5.79 5.79
*A from drawing

88 76 50 41 33 23

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Variable Speed Sizing Information
FPM* 2.5 - 5.0 6 - 12 10 - 20 12 - 24 17 - 34 24.5 - 49
Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-R1SE Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1Mounting S or R S or R S or R S or R S or R S or R Position* 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 Suffix SE SE SE SE SE SE

Motor Part Number
Example: 05V-018 Prefix 05 05 05 05 05 05 Voltage VVVVVVRatio 120 050 030 025 018 012 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 1 1 1 1 1 1 A* 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 6.45 6.45
*A from drawing

73 63 42 34 27 19

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SE (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 051-120 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@4.5 FPM)

Top or Bottom Drive
Fixed Speed Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 11 18 22 30 44 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 88 76 50 41 33 23

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt M1M1M1M1M1M1T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 SESESESESESE5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025 Prefix Voltage Ratio 05 05 05 05 05 05 111111120 050 030 025 018 012 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information*
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 *A 6.47 6.47 6.47 6.47 5.79 5.79
*A from drawing

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Variable Speed Sizing Information
FPM* 2.5 - 5.0 6 - 12 10 - 20 12 - 24 17 - 34 24.5 - 49
Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10
*See Drive Location Chart

Motor Part Number
Example: 05V-012 Prefix Voltage Ratio 05 05 05 05 05 05 VVVVVV120 050 030 025 018 012 HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information*
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 1 1 1 1 1 1 *A 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 6.45 6.45
*A from drawing

73 63 42 34 27 19

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Notes:

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SE-5M2525 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 05V-050 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@6 TO 12 FPM) See Drive Accessory Page (Page 39) for standard duty cords, switches, and plugs

1. Speeds can be reduced to 1/10 of their stated speed and provides 88 inch lbs. of torque by using a decimal reducer (Part No. 125-0205-10x) 2. Fixed speed motors are UL, cUL, and CE approved; however, the variable speed motor is not 3. Torque values are based upon start-up torque

QC Industries

513.753.6000

33

125 Series Pneumatic Drives

Side Drive
Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for mounting Drive Location package and gearmotor ordering information. The 1 3 box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

8.59

.72 .50

2.93 .31

5.17

.38

Front View

Top View
1 3

Remote Drive
5.93 .28 DIA. Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 3 1 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

2.94 5.23 2.00 .50

4.25

4.88

.75 3.50

Front View

1.31

Top View

1

3

Top Drive
Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

5.12 9.50 2.93 * 3.50 .38

6.31 1.75

Front View
*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

Top View

1

3

Bottom Drive
.33 Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

2.56 9.50 5.12 .38 1.75 6.31 3.50

Front View

Top View

1

3

34

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Pneumatic Side or Remote Drive
Motor Part Number
Example: 30A-015 Suffix SA Prefix 30 Voltage ARatio 015 Vane 4 Max PSI 80

Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S3SA

Motor Information

FPM* 14-144

Torque In. Lbs. See Chart Below

Prefix M1-

Mounting S or R

Position* 1 or 3

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SA Top Drive Mounting Package with Chain

Motor Part No. Example: 30A-015 4 Vane Reversible Pnuematic Motor

2.10

2.00 1.00 1/4-18 NPT
1/4-18 NPT
80
100

1.59 1/4-18 NPT 3.42

60

120

40

0

160

1/4-18 NPT

.88 HEX
3.21

Needle Valve Part Number: 125-0034-VLV1 The QC Industries Needle Valve acts as a throttling device, and is sized to incrementally control the speed of the Standard Duty Pneumatic Drive

Typical Arrangement

Filter, Regulator, Lubricator Part Number: 125-0034-FRL The QC Industries Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator has been sized to handle the flow and pressure requirements of the Standard Duty Pneumatic Drive

Top or Bottom Drive
Sizing Information
FPM* 14-144 Torque In. Lbs. See Chart See Chart

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-T1SA-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* M1T or B 1 or 3 Suffix SABelt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 CH 10 10

Motor Part No.
Example: 30A-015 Prefix 30 Voltage ARatio 015

140

20

Motor Information
Vane 4 Max PSI 80

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SA-CH1010 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Chain)

Motor Part No. Example: 30A-015 (4 Vane Reversible Pneumatic Motor)

Torque vs. Speed
100
80 P SI

Air Consumption vs. Speed
24

80 CFM (Free Air) Consumption
60 P

20
80 PS I
PS I

SI

16

Torque Lbs. In.

60

60

12

40

40 PS

40 P

SI

I

8

20 PSI

20

20 PSI

4

0 Notes:

0 0 36 72 108 144 Speed - FPM (Output)

0

36

72

108

144

Speed - FPM (Output)

1. Motor comes standard with muffler and in-line filter. 2. Speed should be controlled on the exhaust of air to preserve maximum torque output and a stable speed control. 3. Max speed is 61 FPM @ 80 PSI. 4. Both chain and timing belt drives have the same torque rating.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

35

125 Series Heavy Duty Drives

Side Drive
B DIA.* B DIA. * 4.14 .48 1.77 A* Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and 1-J gearmotor ordering 3-G information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1.34 .87 3.89

Front View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

Top View

1-J

3-G

Remote Drive
Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 3-J 1-G right for mounting package and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

B DIA. * A* 2.75 2.88

B DIA. * .44 DIA. .50 DIA.

1.74 3.75 2.88

1.12

Front View
Note: 56 frame gear motors extend below gear box mounting plate and may require shimming

Top View

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

1-G

3-J

Top Drive
1.86 B DIA.* B DIA. * Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-J mounting package and 3-G gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

A* 9.50 5.68 ** 3.50 1.75 .38

1.37

Front View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

Top View

1-J

3-G

Bottom Drive

**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

1.75

.33

B DIA.*

9.50

5.30

A*

3.50 1.86 B DIA. * .38

1.37

Front View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page The motor can be rotated in 90O increments when attaching it to the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when deciding where the motor capacitor and work box will be located.

Top View
Motor Dimension Chart 161 163 16V 251 253 25V

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-G mounting package and 3-J gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1-G

3-J

331

333

33V

501

503 6.19

50V 503 (ID) 4.98 7.23

A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15

36

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Fixed or Variable Speed
Side Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 60 120 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120 128 132 130 128 107 82 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Heavy Duty Electric

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S1J0 Mounting S S S S S S S Position* 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G Suffix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Motor Part Number
Example: 161 - 50J Prefix Voltage Ratio Gearbox Hand 16 1,3,V,D50 G or J 16 16 25 25 33 50 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D40 30 20 15 10 05 G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J HP

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 3.2 4.8 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C

1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Remote Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 60 120 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120 128 132 130 128 107 82 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-R1G0 Mounting R R R R R R R Position* 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J Suffix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prefix 16 16 16 25 25 33 50

Motor Part Number
Example: 251-20G Voltage 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,DRatio 50 40 30 20 15 10 05 Gearbox Hand G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/3 1/2 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 3.2 4.8 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S3J0 (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)

Voltage Key
1 3 V D 115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller For optional AC controls, see p. 38 For optional AC controls, see p. 38 See controller on p. 38 Customer to supply controller

Top or Bottom Drive
Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 175 200 225 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 95 (belt) 120 (chain) 95 (belt) 128 (chain) 98 (belt) 132 (chain) 93 (belt) 130 (chain) 89 (belt) 128 (chain 87 (belt) 107 (chain) 84 (belt) 107 (chain) 89 (belt) 100 (chain) 67 (belt) 67 (chain) 82 (belt) 82 (chain) 68 (belt) 68 (chain) 59 (belt) 59 (chain) 51 (belt) 51 (chain) 46 (belt) 46 (chain)

Fixed or Variable Speed
Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 30 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 12 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 40 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 34 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 14 5M 25 40 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 25 44 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 18
*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No.
Example: 503-05J Prefix Voltage 16 16 16 25 25 25 33 33 33 50 50 50 50 50 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V D, 1,3,V ,DRatio 50 40 30 20 15 15 10 10 10 05 05 05 05 05 Gearbox Hand G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 2.5/2.8 2.5/2.8 2.5/2.8 7.4/3.7 7.4/3.7 7.4/3.7 7.4/3.7 7.4/3.7 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.5/0.7 1.5/0.7 1.5/0.7 2.1/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.1/1.0 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) Notes:

Motor Part No. Example: 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon running torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460VAC 3ph motors only. 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

QC Industries

See Drive Accessories pages (p. 38 & 39) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

513.753.6000

37

125 Series Drive Accessories
Motor Controls
6.00 5.00 3X .19 DIA. 115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1/2 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 1 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 1 Enclosure Forward/Reverse switch, Run/Brake switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-01 125-0149-09* Specifications/Features:

8.00

5.00

3.45

1.25

Standard NEMA 1DC Control Wiring: cords & plugs

Standard DC Control
2X .88 DIA. 2.50 Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

*Includes 8’ cord from control to AC plug and 8’ cord from control to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).

2.84 2.40

4.45

Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1/3 phase, 50/60 hz input, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc/CE IP 20 Enclosure 3-digit LED display Forward/Reverse switch Run/Stop button, Accel/Decel buttons Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number:* 125-0054-5C-11-05 125-0054-5C-21-05 125-0054-5C-23-20 125-0054-5C-43-10

4.57

5.73

5.13

4X .18 DIA.

.34

115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20

Standard AC Control
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63 Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Forward/Off/Reverse switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38

.19 7.20 6.35 .85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

NEMA 4X DC Control

Washdown DC Control

2.20

1.20

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63 Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Run/Stop switch Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-37

.19 7.20 6.35 .85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

NEMA 4X AC Control

Washdown AC Control

2.20

1.20

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

38

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Motion Controls
.25 DIA. 3.63 The Motor Starter is an overload protection that also provides a means of using a Remote E-Stop for safety. The starter is equipped with an undervoltage trip to protect against autostarting after the overload condition has been corrected. Also includes short circuit protection. Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max 230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max 460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max UL/CSA/CE Start/Stop buttons IP55 Enclosure To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38-115 125-0054-38-230 125-0054-38-460

5.13

5.75

2.00 .72

4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT

Motor Starter
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure

TURN TO RELEASE E-STOP 2.50 3.13

The E-Stop accessory is mounted directly to the Motor Starter enclosure, providing a means of stopping the motor for safety. It can be padlocked for servicing, and contains a start button for restarting the motor after the pushbutton has been released. Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE E-Stop can be locked out/includes start button IP55 Rated Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure

2.25

5.88

LOCK-OUT TAG-OUT To Order: Part Number: ELECT-061 E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter

E-Stop Accessory
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

3.50 2X .22 DIA. 3.00

The Remote E-Stop provides a means for locking out power to the motor for safety. It includes an IP65 enclosure and mounting bracket to allow the E-Stop to be mounted directly to the side of the conveyor frame. Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE IP65 Enclosure To Order: Part Number: ELECT-063-WBRKT

2.67

2.89

2.37 3.76

2.75

E-Stop with enclosure

Remote E-Stop

Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frame Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches

Standard Duty Motor Options
Part Number 125-0149-01 125-0149-02 125-0149-03 125-0149-04 Description Fixed speed standard duty electric motor ON/OFF switch Fixed speed standard duty electric motor FORWARD/REVERSE switch Variable speed standard duty electric motor FORWARD/REVERSEswitch Fixed speed standard duty electric motor 8’ cord and plug

Heavy Duty Motor Options
Part Number 125-0149-05 125-0149-06 125-0149-07 125-0149-09 Description ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor 8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor 8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details

QC Industries

513.753.6000

39

125 Series Drive Accessories

Double Universal Joint
1/8 KEYWAY 1.69 4.88 MAX 1.40 0.6 2.75 1.50 0.75 MAX 1.34 1.09 1/2 HEX 2X 11/32 HOLES 3.25 2.50 The Double Universal Joint with bearing mount is used to couple a remote mounted motor with a conveyor drive shaft when there is not common shaft alignment. This assembly should be used with Drive End Mounts. Note: Torque rating of universal joint at average angle of 15O (.375 offset) and 350 rpm is 125 inch lbs. Higher speeds and angle will reduce rating.

.50 DIA. BORE 1.00 DIA. Part No. 125-0148-00 (with bearing mount) Part No. 125-0148-03 (without bearing mount)

CAUTION: Universal joint must be guarded. (Guarding is the responsibility of the end user.)

Single Piece Flex Coupling
2.50 A B
*Torque Rating (Inch Lbs.)

Part Number

A

125-0009-02 .5 in. diameter .5 in. diameter 125-0009-03 .5 in. diameter w/keyway 1.62 125-0009-06 .5 in. hex .5 in. hex

100 100

The Single Piece Flex Coupling is used to couple the remote mounted motor with the conveyor drive shaft. This coupling can also be used to couple between gang driven conveyors.

.5 in. hex

100

B

*Value based on non-reversing applications with an angular offset of up to 5O.

Three Piece Flex Coupling
1.37 A 2.0

Part Number

A

B .5 in. hex .5 in. hex .5 in. hex

*Torque Rating (Inch Lbs.)

125-0135-00 .5 in. diameter w/keyway
B 1.06 DIA. .97 DIA.

114 114 114 114

125-0135-01 .625 in. diameter w/keyway 125-0135-02 .5 in. hex

The Three Piece Flex Coupling is used to couple the remote mounted motor with the conveyor drive shaft. This coupling can also be used to couple between gang driven conveyors. This coupling is used on all side drives. Note: Use of the three piece flex coupling may require the 1/2” hex shaft retaining collar (Part No. 125-0078-026) to prevent separation. Please consult factory.

1/2” Hex Shaft Retaining Collar Part No. 125-0078-026

125-0135-07 .5 in. diameter .5 in. diameter

*Value based on standard duty non-reversing applications with an angular offset of up to 1O. For heavy duty applications, divide torque by 2.

Drive Extension Shaft

Drive Extension Shaft Support Block
3.25
LE NG

2.50
TH

2X 11/32 HOLES

Length 23 in. 35 in. 47 in. 59 in. 71 in. 83 in. 95 in.

Part No. 125-0005-23 125-0005-35 125-0005-47 125-0005-59 125-0005-71 125-0005-83 125-0005-95

1/2 HEX 7/ 8 1 1/ 4 1/2 2.75 1.34 1/2 HEX

Part No. 125-0148-05
The Drive Extension Shaft can be used to gang drive multiple conveyors and/or for power take-off of remote drives. The Drive Extension Shaft Support Block is used to support lengths of shaft not supported by the drive coupling or a conveyor.

40

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Typical Gang Drive Examples
Bottom Drive withTwo Flex Couplings

Note 1: 1ESBH06-120-ASQ-MAA 125-0009-03 125-0005-23 125-0009-03 M1-B1G0-5M2525 1ESBH06-120-ADQ-MAA 161-50G This typical gang drive application shows a bottom drive mounting arrangement. The couplings and drive extension shaft are shown on the opposing page. Please note that the conveyor to which the drive is attached has a “D” designator in the drive pulley portion of the part number.

Side Drive with Through Shaft & Drive End Mounts
125-0013-00 Note 2: 1ESBH06-120-AHQ-MAA This typical gang drive application shows a side drive mounting arrangement. The drive end mounts are shown on page 27, and drive extension shafts are shown on the opposing page. Please note that the conveyor to which the drive is nearest has an “H” designator in the drive pulley portion of the part number.

125-0014-00 125-0005-23 125-0013-00 1ESBH06-120-AHQ-MAA 161-50J 125-0015-00 M1-S1J0-HEX*

*Non-Standard Part Number

Remote Drive with Flex Couplings

Note 3: This typical gang drive application shows a remote drive mounting arrangement. The couplings and drive extension shafts are shown on the opposing page. Please note that the conveyor to which the drive is nearest has a “D” designator in the drive pulley portion of the part number.

1ESBH06-120-ASQ-MAA 125-0009-03 125-0005-23 161-50G 125-0148-03 M1-R1G0 125-0009-03 1ESBH06-120-ADQ-MAA

How to Order

The examples above help illustrate how to assemble part numbers for typical applications. The following shows the steps needed to correctly size a gang driven application: Step One: Add up the equivalent load for each conveyor you plan to gang drive. (Using pages 10, 14, and/or 18) Step Two: Size a drive based upon the total equivalent load from Step One Step Three: Determine which type of drive arrangement you need: side, remote, top, or bottom (Using page 32, 34, or 36) Step Four: Change the drive pulley digit of the conveyor part number to reflect which drive arrangement you are using. "D" for top or bottom drives and "H" for side or remote drives. Conveyor Part number example: 1ESBH04-060-ADQ-MAA - The "D" designates a dual output drive pulley to be used in a gang driven application using a top or bottom drive. The “H” designates a hex input pulley to be used in a gang driven application using a side or remote drive. Step Five: Determine the couplings and drive extension shaft needed, using the above diagrams as a guide. This information can be located on the opposing page Step Six: Ensure that the couplings can handle the torque requirements of the system. Reference page 40 Please consult the factory if you have questions.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

41

125 Series Automation Accessories
Motion Detection
• Compact design • Easy to retrofit into existing conveyors • Magnetic proximity sensor allows for dependable operation in harsh operating environments • Provides one pulse per tail pulley revolution
.86

Motion detection can be used in all applications where it is necessary to know the conveyor belt is running while other machines are operating. QC’s motion detection system monitors your conveyor and provides a “belt running” signal to your machine conrtrol system or PLC.

4 PIN 2 WIRE RECEPTACLE CLAMPED IN FRAME

4 PIN 2WIRE CONNECTOR 1.00 PROX SENSOR #10-32 F.H.C.S. SPRING ALLOWS SENSOR MOVEMENT FOR QUICK BELT CHANGE .54 .75

.63 .06 6.06

.63 .60 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 BROWN (+) N/A BLUE (-) N/A Electrical Specifications: Supply Voltage - 24 VDC Load Current - 200 mA, normally open Operating Temperature: -25O to +70OC (-13OF to +158OF)

PIN CONFIGURATION

Motion Detection Retrofit Kit
Conveyor Width 2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in. Part No. 125-0335-02 125-0335-03 125-0335-04 125-0335-06 125-0335-08 125-0335-10 125-0335-12 125-0335-18 125-0335-24 Includes: (1) 4-pin two wire male connector (1) 4-pin two wire female connector (1) Mounting block and spring assembly (1) Mounting hardware kit (1) Template for mounting hole transfer (1) Detectable tail assembly (1) Proximity sensor
Note: This kit can only be ordered for installation of motion detection into an existing conveyor in the field Note: Holes to be drilled in the field by the customer.

Installed Motion Detection Kit
Conveyor Width 2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in. Part No. 125-0340-02 125-0340-03 125-0340-04 125-0340-06 125-0340-08 125-0340-10 125-0340-12 125-0340-18 125-0340-24 Includes: (1) 4-pin two wire male connector (1) 4-pin two wire female connector (1) Mounting block and spring assembly (1) Mounting hardware kit (1) Detectable tail assembly exchanged for the standard tail assembly (1) Proximity sensor (1) Installation of sensor kit into conveyor
Note: This kit can only be ordered with the purchase of a new conveyor Note: Please denote a “D” in the tail pulley portion of conveyor part number

Drip Pans
Features: Attaches to standard width and length conveyors, and is ideal for recapturing oils and lubricants. Note: Designed for use with fixed side rails that use side rail clamps and the universal adjustable side mount only. To Order: Fill in the last five digits of the part number with the width and length of the conveyor it is to be used on. Part No. 125-0403-WW-LLL

1/2-14 NPT

1/2-14 NPT

Part No. 125-0403-

-

42

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Automation Accessories
90O Transfer Plate Inline Transfer Plate

Conveyor Width 2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

Part No. 125-0230-02 125-0230-03 125-0230-04 125-0230-06 125-0230-08 125-0230-10 125-0230-12 125-0230-18 125-0230-24 Conveyor Width 2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in. Part No. 125-0220-02 125-0220-03 125-0220-04 125-0220-06 125-0220-08 125-0220-10 125-0220-12 125-0220-18 125-0220-24

Notes: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction or cleated belts. Discharge conveyor must be pushing. Customer to drill screw holes to mount plate.

Note: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction or cleated belts.

Pivot Mount Set
Note: The pivot mount attaches to the tail end of the conveyor and enables a pivot point from which other devices can lift the conveyor. Includes left and right hand mount.

Custom Rolling Nosebars
Note: The rolling nosebar can be used with a conveyor running less than 60 fpm and carrying less than 5 lbs. per inch of conveyor width.

To Order: Part No. 125-0172-00

To Order: Please denote an ‘SAF’ in the belt portion of the conveyor part number, and an ‘R’ for the tail pulley part of the conveyor part number. Example: 1ESBH04-048-ASR-SAF

Adjustable Stops
To Order: 1. Select an adjustable stop for 1” sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot (See pages 22 -24) 2. Using the chart below, fill in the part number using the nominal width of the conveyor for the last two digits of the part number Part No. 1” Sides 2” Sides Single Tee Slot Example: 125-0232-04 End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has 1” aluminum side rails with wear strip 125-0232-WW 125-0234-WW 125-0233-WW

Adjustable Diverters

Note: The adjustable diverter comes with a 5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2) mounting assemblies that the user can utilize to help orient the product around a 90O transfer.

To Order: Part No. 125-0250-000

QC Industries

513.753.6000

43

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
Specifications
• • • • • • • Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm* Conveyor made from corrosion resistant components for wipe-down applications
*See Technical Data on page 46

Overview Dimensions

.42

.75

6.13

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please consult factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

1.89 *

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.75 .82 L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH .88

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

44

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Corrosion resistant construction is achieved by replacing steel components with stainless steel or electroless nickel plated components to help prevent or minimize rust. Bearings are filled with food grade grease instead of standard grease. Anodized aluminum is used on some surfaces as well as on many of our side and guide rail profiles • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Tail Pulley Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with food grade grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with food grade grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against offcenter load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley available in solid output design or dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

45

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load. A conveyor application that is accumulating a 5-pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Lbs.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 46-A
500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 25 50 150 100 75 75 50 37.5 3 4 100 200 125 150 175 87.5 250 300 225 450

1. Nominal Load

1.

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 46-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry, to ensure it can carry the load. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

6 8 10 12 18 24 Belt Width Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D) Note: See page 47 Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

2

2. Accumulation

2.
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 46-B
3.0 Equivalnt Load Constant 2.5 2.5 2.0 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.0 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.0 0.0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 0.6 1.1 1.6 2.3 2.1 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 52 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane). Enter result on Line Two.

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

3.

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or declining applications choose a factor from Figure 46-B based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. Enter result on Line Three.

4. Side Seals

4.

If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent small parts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found on page 54. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factor of 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four. **Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 46-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult the factory.

Angle Factor

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

STOP

Conveyor Friction - Figure 46-C
200 132 168

5. Conveyor Friction

5.
Equivalent Load

150 96 100 72 50 0 Conveyor Width 2 36 3 42 4 48 6 60 8 72 10 84 12 96 36 42 48 60 84

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 46-C. Enter result on Line Five.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)

lbs.

18 132

24 168

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (see pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gear motor (see pages 60-65). Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

Frictional Load

46

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Order
Step 1 Construction Frame Style Drive Type
3” 03

Step 2

Step 3 Drive Location Drive Pulley

Step 4

Tail Pulley

Length

Length

Length

Frame

Series 1 = 125

Widths 2” 02 4” 04 6” 06 8” 08 10” 10 12” 12 18” 18 24” 24

C

A

Choose three-digit belt ordering code on pages 52-53. Example: 1EREH03-048-ASQ-MAA 125 Series conveyor with corrosion resistant construction and 1.81” stainless steel frame. Conveyor measures 3” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.

Series

Width

Width

Belt Belt Belt

1 E R
Step 1

H

-

-

-

Drive Type E = End Drive

Construction R = Corrosion Resistant

Frame E = 1.81” Stainless Steel B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)
Custom colors available - Contact factory

Frame Style H = Straight Frame

Step 2
Lengths* 24” 024 36” 036 48” 048 60” 060 72” 072 96” 096 120” 144” 120 144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3
Drive Location D
d an St ar d

Drive Pulley Type
Cap Solid Output Shaft 1/2” Dia*

Tail Pulley Type S
d an St ar d

Standard

Q

B
A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

1/2” Dia* Dual Output

D

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Accessories such as Drives, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

Note: proceed to page 54 to continue sizing your conveyor...

QC Industries

513.753.6000

47

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Cleated Conveyors

Specifications
• • • • • • • • Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm* Multiple Cleat Heights Available Conveyor made from corrosion resistant components for wipe-down applications
*See Technical Data on page 50

Overview Dimensions

.42

.75

6.13

W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

W - 1.37 = CLEAT WIDTH 1.89 *

CLEAT HEIGHT SEE PAGE 51

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.82

L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH

.88

.75

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

48

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Corrosion resistant construction is achieved by replacing steel components with stainless steel or electroless nickel-plated components to help prevent or minimize rust. Bearings are filled with food grade grease instead of standard grease. Anodized aluminum is used on some surfaces as well as on many of our side and guide rail profiles • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats

Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 51 Step 4 for options

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with food grade grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with food grade grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against offcenter load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley available in solid output design or dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

49

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Cleated Conveyors
Technical Data
Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 50-A
500 450 400 450

Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load. A conveyor application that is carrying a 5-pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the three steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque

350 300 Lbs. 250 200 150 100 50 25 150 100 75 75 50 37.5 50 3 4 100 200 125 150 175 87.5 250 300 225

1. Nominal Load

1.

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 50-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry, to ensure it can carry the load. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

6 8 Belt Width Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 51

0

2

10

12

18

24

Pushing (Drive Location C&D)

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

2.

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 50-B
3.0 Equivalnt Load Constant 3.0 3.1

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Two. For inclining or declining applications choose a factor from Figure 50-B based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. Enter result on Line Two.

2.5 2.5 2.0 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.0 0.8 0.5 0.3 0.0 0.0 0 5 0.6 1.1 1.6 2.3 2.1

2.6

2.8

2.9

STOP

**Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines One and Two together, please reference Figure 50-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Two. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor.

Angle Factor

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

3. Conveyor Friction

3.
Conveyor Friction - Figure 50-C
200 132 168

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 50-C. Enter result on Line Three.

150 Equivalent Load 96 100 72 50 0 Conveyor Width Frictional Load 2 36 3 42 4 48 6 60 8 72 10 84 12 96 36 42 48 60 84

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-3)

lbs.

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (see pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gear motor (see pages 60-65). Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

18 132

24 168

50

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Order
Step 1 Construction
4” 04

Step 2 Frame Style

Step 3 Drive Location Drive Pulley

Step 4

Step 5 # of Cleats # of Cleats # of Cleats

Drive Type
3” 03

Tail Pulley

Length

Length

Length

Frame

Series 1 = 125

Widths 2” 02 6” 06 8” 08 10” 10 12” 12 18” 18 24” 24

C

A

Choose a base belt material and cleat height Cleat Height 5mm 19mm CAD CBD 1/2” CAE CBE 3/4” CAF CBF 1” w/corr. sides CAH CBH 1” CAG CBG 2” CAI CBI 3” CAK CBK

Note 1: All belts must have a cleat indent of width minus 1.37”, except 1” cleats with corrugated sidewall. That cleat indent is width minus 3.62” Note 2: Cleated belts are intended for use in conjunction with indented or adjustable guides (see page 23)

Determine the total number of cleats on the conveyor. Multiply conveyor length (in inches) by 2, divide by the desired spacing between the cleats (in inches). This will result in the total number of cleats evenly spaced around the circumference of the belt. Note: Must have a whole number of cleats. Example: 1EREH08-048-ASQ-CAE016 125 Series conveyor with corrosion resistant construction and 1.81” stainless steel frame. Conveyor measures 8” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor belt has a 1/2” high cleat every 6”.

Series

Width

Width

Belt Belt Belt

1 E R

H

-

-

-

Step 1
Drive Type E = End Drive Construction R = Corrosion Resistant Frame E = 1.81” Stainless Steel B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)
Custom colors available - Contact factory

Frame Style H = Straight Frame

Step 2
Lengths* 24” 024 36” 036 48” 048 60” 060 72” 072 96” 096 120” 144” 120 144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3
Drive Location D
d an St ar d
Cap Solid Output Shaft 1/2” Dia*

Drive Pulley Type S
d an St ar d

Tail Pulley Type

Standard

Q

B
A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

1/2” Dia* Dual Output

D

Step 4

* 1/8” sq. key included

MAA (Standard Urethane) CAB CBB UAC (White Urethane)

Step 5

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Accessories such as Drives, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details. Note: proceed to page 54 to continue sizing your conveyor...

QC Industries

513.753.6000

51

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors
Top si of F de Coef ricti on ( ficient CoF ) Sho rt Te Max rm P Tem a pera rt ture Max (°F) . Tem Ambien t pera ture Operati ng (°F) Anti -Sta tic Ave ra Thic ge Bel t knes s (in ches )
LOW LOW LOW LOW HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW 212 212 212 212 212 212 212 194 212 212 248 140 175 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 158 176 176 212 140 175 YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES YES YES NO YES YES 0.075 0.075 0.075 0.075 0.103 0.145 0.072 0.083 0.185 0.054 0.051 0.060 0.054 MED LOW MED MED MED LOW LOW HIGH MED 356 356 400 300 300 230 212 248 176 356 356 350 212 212 194 176 212 176 YES YES NO YES YES YES YES YES YES 0.059 0.051 0.085 0.079 0.067 0.060 0.075 0.083 0.100 LOW LOW LOW MED HIGH MED HIGH LOW MED 212 212 230 248 176 212 212 158 176 176 176 194 212 176 176 212 158 176 175 212 176 YES YES YES YES YES 104e 104e 105e 105e NO NO NO 0.075 0.075 0.055 0.047 0.050 0.063 0.080 0.040 0.100 0.023 0.024 0.040 0.060 0.050 0.075 0.063 0.071 0.070 0.067 0.072 0.098 0.072 0.059 0.059 0.090 0.040 0.177 0.210 0.106 0.078 0.175 VERY LOW 175 VERY LOW 248 VERY LOW 176 MED LOW MED MED MED MED MED MED MED HIGH LOW MED MED LOW HIGH HIGH MED MED HIGH 158 176 212 212 212 175 175 175 302 212 194 356 176 176 212 225 212 212 175 158 176 176 176 176 175 175 175 248 176 158 356 176 176 176 225 176 176 175 YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES NO YES NO NO YES YES

ptio n

Belt Orde ring Cod e

scri

e De

Top Surf ac

Top Surf ac

e Ma

teria

l

Multi-Purpose Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard Urethane C. Option #2-Spill Edge Cleat D. Option #3-Perforated Belt High Friction Belts A. Grey Diamond Top High Adhesion B. Green High Tack PVC C. Beige FDA High Adhesion D. Black Lateral Grooved High Adhesion E. Black Rough Top High Adhesion Accumulation Belts (Low Friction) A. White FDA Fabric Accumulator C. Black Tight Weave Accumulator D. Grey Textured Urethane Accumulator E. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator Heat-Resistant Belts A. White Silicone Heat Resistor B. White Silicone Translucent Resistor C. Smooth White FDA Silicone Heat Resistor D. Blue Nitrile Heat Resistor E. White Nitrile Heat Resistor Cut Resistant Belts A. Yellow Cut Resistor B. Standard Urethane C. Black Dimple Top Cut Resistor D. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor FDA Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Sealed Edge Standard Urethane C. Pure White FDA D. Woven White FDA E. White FDA Urethane High Adhesion Static Conductive Belts A. Textured Carbon Impregnated B. Accumulation Static Conductive C. Low Friction Static Conductive D. Structured Static Conductive Translucent Belts A. Green Translucent Accumulator B. FDA Fabric Translucent Accumulator C. Silicone Translucent Accumulator Color Contrasting Belts A. Gray Textured Contraster B. Smooth Green Urethane Contraster C. Dark Green PVC Contraster D. Light Blue Urethane Contraster E. Smooth Black PVC Contraster Non-Marking Belts A. Felt Topped Product Protector B. Fabric Topped Product Protector C. Cotton Topped Product Protector D. Black Elastomer Product Protector Release Properties Belts A. Beige Silicone Product Release B. White PVC Product Release C. Textured Silicone Product Release D. Smooth Habilene Product Release E. Smooth Silicone Product Release Specialty/Profile Belts A. Green Sawtooth Profile Belt B. White Grooved Rubber C. Stipple Top PVC Profile D. Negative Pyramid Profile E. Green Longitudinal PVC Profile Belt

MAA Smooth MAB Smooth, Sealed Edge MAC Longitudinal Serrated Cleat MAD Smooth, Perforations FAA FAB FAC FAD FAF AAA AAC AAD AAE Snakeskin Matte Smooth Longitudinal Groove Rough Top Fabric Fabric Textured Fabric

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane PVC PVC Soft Silicone PVC PVC Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated

White White White White Light Grey Dark Green Beige Black Black White Black Light Grey Dark Green

YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO NO YES NO NO YES

HAA HAB HAC HAD HAE IAA IAB IAC IAD

Fine Texture Fabric Smooth Coarse Structure Smooth Smooth Smooth Dimple Top Structured

Silicone Silicone Impregnated Silicone Nitrile Rubber Nitrile Rubber Urethane Urethane Hard Urethane Nitrile Rubber

White White White Blue White Yellow White Black Black

NO NO YES NO NO NO YES NO NO

UAA UAB UAC UAD UAE EAA EAB EAC EAD TAA TAB TAC

Smooth Smooth, Sealed Edge Matte Smooth Smooth Textured Rough Texture Smooth Structured Textured Fabric Textured Textured Smooth Matte Matte Smooth Felt Fabric Fabric Felt Smooth Matte, Smooth Fine Texture Smooth Textured Sawtooth Lateral Groove Stipple Top Textured Longitudinal Groove

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Urethane Impregnated Nitrile Rubber Urethane NBR Impregnated Fleece Impregnated PU Urethane Impregnated Silicone

White White White Translucent White Black Black Black Black Light Green Translucent Translucent

YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES

PAA PAB PAC PAD PAE NAA NAB NAC NAD RAA RAB RAC RAD RAE SAA SAB SAC SAD SAE

PVC Urethane PVC Urethane PVC Felt Spun Polyester Cotton Polyester Silicone Non-Stick PVC Silicone Habilene Silicone PVC Nitrile Rubber PVC Urethane PVC

Grey Green Dark Green Light Blue Black White White Natural White Black Beige White White White White Green White White White Green

NO YES NO YES NO YES YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES YES NO

Chemical Resistant Belts Due to the broad spectrum of chemicals and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in chemical application circumstances. Our application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand the chemicals present as well as the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach delivers the best possible product for the application.

52

QC Industries

513.753.6000

FDA

Belt Selection Guide

Belt Colo r

Specifications subject to change - consult factory

QC Industries offers conveyor belting for a wide variety of applications and industries. These pages cover a number of the more popular belts we have provided through the years. These belts have all been tested at QC Industries and offer a compatible fit to the 125 Series conveyors. If you have a specific need that is not covered on these pages, please
Multi-Purpose Belts

contact one of our sales engineers directly at the factory to discuss your application parameters. To Order With Conveyor: Please use the three-digit QC belt code number for conveyor ordering on pages 47 and 51.

To Order Belt Only: Choose nominal conveyor width and length in inches and enter the three-digit belt code. 1E - WW - LLL Example: 1E-08-120-MAA Standard urethane belt for an 8” wide by 120” long 125 Series conveyor

M

AA

QUICK SHIP!

M

AB

M

AC

M

AD

High-Friction Belts

A FA

B FA

C FA

D FA

F FA

Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)

AA

A

AA

C

AA

D

AA

E

Heat-Resistant Belts

HA

A

HA

B

HA

C

HA

D

HA

E

Cut-Resistant Belts

IA

A

IA

B

IA

C

IA

D

FDA/USDA Belts

UA

A

UA

B

UA

C

UA

D

UA

E

Static Conductive Belts

EA

A

EA

B

EA

C

EA

D

Translucent Belts

A TA
Color Contrasting Belts

B TA

C TA

A PA

B PA

C PA

D PA

E PA

Non-Marking Belts

NA

A

NA

B

NA

C

NA

D

Release Properties Belts

RA

A

RA

B

RA

C

RA

D

RA

E

Specialty/Profile Belts

SA

A

SA

B

SA

C

SA

D

SA

E

Chemical Resistant Belts Due to the wide variety of chemical and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in these application circumstances. Our application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand not only the chemicals present, but the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach delivers the best possible product for the application.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

53

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Side & Guide Rails
Fixed Side Rails
W + 1.06 W + 1.06 W + .06 .33 * .33 * .46 * W - .61 W + 1.06 W - .19

2.22

2.22

2.35

1/3” Side Rails
125R-0169 pictured

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Part No. 125R-0153-

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with seals** Part No. 125R-0169To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0169-096 W + 1.19 W + .06

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125R-0170To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0170-024

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0153-048

W + 1.19 W + .06

W + 1.19 W - .19 .78 1.03 * .88

W - .61 .93 * .78 .93 *

2.81 2.03 2.03

2.81

2.91 2.03

1” Side Rails
125R-0178 pictured

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Part No. 125R-0174To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0174-048

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with seals** Part No. 125R-0177To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0177-024 W + 1.19 W + .06 W - .61

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125R-0178To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0178-096

W + 1.19 W + .06

W + 1.19 W - .18

1.93 *

1.78 3.81 2.03

1.93 *

1.78 3.81 2.03

2.05 *

1.90 3.93 2.03

2” Side Rails
125R-0215 pictured

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides Part No. 125R-0215To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0215-024

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with seals** Part No. 125R-0217To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0217-036

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125R-0216To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0216-060

Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see pages 52-53 Note 2: All rails are sold in sets ** Side seals are not intended for cleated belts, high friction belts, or belt speeds exceeding 30 FPM Note 3: Side rails start 1 11/16” from tail end and stop 3 1/2” from drive end Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory

54

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Adjustable Guide Rails
3.00 ADJ. W - .10 MAX. 2.50 MAX. * 1.13 MIN. * 3.00 ADJ. W - .25 MAX.

3.25 MAX. * 1.99 MIN. * 4.34

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX. 1” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125R-0281W - .38 MAX.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX 2” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125R-0282-

2-Axis Adjustable Guides
125R-0281-048-T pictured

3.00 ADJ.

5.25 MAX. * 3.00 MIN. * 4.34

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal length of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or a thumb wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for set screw and (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number. Example 125R-0281-120-T 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheel adjustment for a 120” long conveyor The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the product being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and horizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility. Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The thumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal for quick adjustments, because no tools are required.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX. 3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No.125R-0283-

W + 1.57 W + 1.42 W - 1.21 2.40 MAX. * 2.13 MIN. * 3.28 3.94 W - 1.21

1.62 MAX. * 1.03 MIN. *

Indented Guides
125R-0219 pictured

1” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No.125R-0219-

2” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No.125R-0218-

W + 1.57 W - 1.31 To Order: Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Example 125R-0219-120 1” adustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long conveyor 4.92 The Indented Guides are designed to work with cleated belts. Each cleated belt is indented slightly (see page 51). The Indented Guide spans the indentation, providing a pocket which surrounds the product being conveyed. 3” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No.125R-0222*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

3.03 *

QC Industries

513.753.6000

55

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Side & Guide Rails
Tee Slotted Extrusions
10-32 UNF THRU .25 To Order: Use part number 125R-0074-035 (Qty. 1) 125R-0074-035-SET (Qty. 4) The Rotate-In Tee Nut is designed to hold lightweight brackets that have a thickness of .148” or under .86 The Rotate-In Tee Nut can be used with the following rails: 1” - 125R-0174, 125R-0177, 125R-0178 2” - 125R-0215, 125R-0217, 125R-0216 Tee-125R-0225, 125R-0199

.19

Rotate-In Tee Nut
125R-0074 pictured

Rotate-In Tee Nut Part No. 125R-0074-035 (Qty 1) Part No. 125R-0074-035-SET (Qty 4)

Note: The Rotate-In Tee Nut works with the 1” and 2” side rails, as well as the Single Tee Slot extrusion and the Multi Tee Slot extrusion.

W + 2.68 W + 1.50

W + 1.28

.73 *

.73 *

1.16 Multi Tee-Slot Side Assembly Part No.125R-0225-

1.16 Single Tee-Slot Side Assembly Part No. 125R-0199-

Multi Tee Slot

To Order: Fill in last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Part number includes one set as shown in drawing.

Single Tee Slot

*Dimensions reflect use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

To Order: Fill in last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Part number includes one set as shown in drawing.

Product Containment Accessories

LANES Custom Sides Available RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3" RAILS A number of other side options exist to meet the demands of a wide variety of applications. Please call our factory for details.

Lane Dividers

Lane Dividers For part number see below

To Order:

LD

R
Construction (R - Corrosion Resistant) Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot) # of Lanes (2,3,4 etc) # of Rails (1, 2, 3, etc) Conveyor Length (in inches) Conveyor Width (in inches) Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)

Example LD-2-08144-12FR 2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long conveyor. One rail with two lanes mounted to the conveyor frame

56

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Flared Side Rails
Flared Side Rails are ideal for applications that require a “drop zone” wider than the width of the conveyor. The rails attach to and require the use of the adjustable guide rails shown at the top of page 55. Additionally, the user can add other components (shown below) to help guide the product as needed. Note: Flared Side Rails should be ordered one size smaller than the nominal length of the conveyor. To Order: Z-1004-012 Z-1004-018 Z-1004-024 Z-1004-030 Z-1004-036 Z-1004-042 Z-1004-048 12” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” length length length length length length length

W + 10.35 MAX. W + 4.41 MIN. 45° W + 4.97 MAX. W - .97 MIN.

4.00

Flared Side Rails

Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide (sold separately) Part # 125R-0282-LLL

L

.25

5.74 MAX. * 4.93 MIN. *

Example: (1) Z-1004-036 A set of 36” long flared side rails

The rails are sold in sets and include mounting hardware Note: Requires Part #125-0282-LLL shown on page 55 L = length of flared side rails

2.90 .90

End Stops are used in conjunction with the Flared Side Rail. Stops are adjustable down the length of the rail. Note: End stops are available for the following width conveyors: 8”, 10”, 12”, 18”, and 24”. To Order: 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” 125-0234-08 125-0234-10 125-0234-12 125-0234-18 125-0234-24

2.35 *

Example: (1) 125-0234-10 One end stop for a 10” wide conveyor equipped with flared side rails

End Stops
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold separately) Part # 125R-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL

Note: Designed to be compatible with 1” and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with a swing gate to help contain product

L L - 4.20 MAX. L - 5.80 MAX.

2.35 *

The Adjustable Hopper is used in conjunction with the Flared Side Rail. The hopper is made from (2) end stops, which are adjustable down the length of the rail. Available for the following width conveyors: 8”, 10” 12” 18”, and 24”. To Order: Please order a quantity of 2: 8” 125-0234-08 10” 125-0234-10 12” 125-0234-12 18” 125-0234-18 24” 125-0234-24 Example: (2) 125-0234-18 Two end stops for an 18” wide conveyor equipped with flared side rails

Adjustable Hopper
L = length of flared side rails
Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL

Note: Designed to be compatible with 1” and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with a swing gate to help contain product *Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

57

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Mounts
Standard Mounts
.22 DIA. .41 1.15 1.32 .13 .38 SLOT 3.50 .31 .34 DIA. .59 .88 1.32 .135 1.25 W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71 3.06 2.06 ** W + 1.46 To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”. The Tee Slot mounted version attaches to 1” siderails, 2” siderails, the single tee slot and the multi tee slot. See page 54 & 55. Part No. 125R-0181-01 (Tee Slot)* Part No. 125R-0181-04 (Frame)* Part No. 125R-0181-05 (For use with multi-tier stand)*
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Universal Adjustable Side Mount
125R-0181-04 pictured

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Frame mounted brackets can only be used with 1” high or lower cleats. T-Slot mounted brackets can only be used with 1/2” high or lower cleats.
W + 1.46

.22 DIA. 1.53 .13 3.10

.34 DIA. .59 .88 .31 3.07 4.81

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.
5.28 **
1.25

The Tee Slot mounted version attaches to 1” siderails, 2” siderails, the single tee slot and the multi tee slot. See page 54 & 56.

Universal Raised Side Mount
125R-0182-04 pictured

.38 SLOT 3.50

.135

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

Part No. 125R-0182-01 (Tee Slot)* Part No. 125R-0182-04 (Frame)*
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Universal raised side mounts work with all cleat heights.

.93 ** Standard method for mounting to stands (fasteners included) .38 W + 1.00 W + 1.75 Alternate method for mounting to stands (fasteners not included) .93 **

.63 3/8-16 CAP SCREW 5/16-18 CAP SCREW .63

To Order: This mount uses existing through holes on the conveyor that are located 6.06” from tail end and 8.5” or 14.5” from drive end. This will mount the conveyor to a flat surface. To order, use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits. Part No. 125R-0116*

Rod Clamp Mount

Example: 125R-0116-06* Rod clamp mount for a 6” wide conveyor
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Notes: Mount cannot be used with Multi Tee or Single Tee Slotted Side Assembly Mount cannot be used with cleated belts

.63

5/16-18 SET SCREW .257 DIA. THRU HOLE

11/32 DIA.

2.89 ** .43 W - 1.50 W - .75 W + 1.00 W + 1.50

1.25 .16

To Order: Attaches directly to the underside of the conveyor frame. To order use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits. Part No. 125R-0011*

.84

Universal Bottom Mount

Example: 125R-0011-04 Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wide conveyor
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Notes: Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface. This mount cannot be used with high adhesion or cleated belts.

**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

58

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Stands
NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet

Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
WW H1 - H2 06 - 09 09 - 12 12 - 15 15 - 18 18 - 21 21 - 24 24 - 27 27 - 30 30 - 33 H1 - H2 33 - 36 36 - 39 39 - 42 42 - 45 45 - 48 48 - 51 51 - 54 54 - 57 57 - 60

To order: H1 Part No. 0182R H2 WW

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. *Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter conveyor width into WW section. NOTE: No additional mounts are required. NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand framework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimum height range is 12 - 15 inches. Example: 0182R - 30 - 33 - 24 (Part No. includes one stand)

H1 - H2

Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches)
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24

Angle Brace

To order: Part No. 125R-0189-00 For use with aluminum stands only. Angle brace can be used on a 125 Series conveyor with a minimum top of belt height of 28”. The angle brace can replace cross ties for conveyors 5’ long and up. When used with casters, angle braces must be used on both stands. Order (1) per stand.

Stainless Steel Tubular Stand
WW

Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
H1 - H2 24 - 27 27 - 30 30 - 33 33 - 36 H1 - H2 36 - 39 39 - 42 42 - 45

To order: H1 Part No. 0188 H2 WW

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. *Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter conveyor width into WW section. NOTE: No additional mounts are required. The mounts are included with the stand. NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand framework on the outside of the conveyor. Example: 0188 - 30 - 33 - 18 (Part No. includes one stand)

Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches)
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24

Casters To order: Part No. 125R-0122-04 Swivel locking caster Order (2) per stand Casters can be added to either aluminum or steel stands. Swivel locking casters increase stand height by 5.50”. Casters should only be used with stands that are 1/3 as wide as they are tall.

Swivel-In Tee Nut To order:
Part No. 125-0074-036 (Qty 1) 125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4) The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal for mounting brackets to an aluminum stand, and allows quick mounting location changes. Note: Swivel-In Tee Nut is zinc plated 1/4-20 thread-in Tee Nut is provided for attaching accessories.

NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag and ensure stability. Because every every application and installation is different, NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag standsstands and ensure stability. Because application and installation is different, the the functionality and performance supports depend on the end user. user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires. functionality and performance of the of the supports depend on the endQC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

59

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Drives
Drive Sizing Technical Data
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 46 and 50). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)

1.

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from pages 46 or 50). Divide this number by 6. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT)
Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages (63 or 65), and write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use a timing belt. For heavy duty drives (listed on page 65), the drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.

2.

3. Enter Service Factor (SF)
Use Chart 60-A below based upon the hours of operation per day as well as starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.

3.

4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT)
Divide the drive train torque (DDT) by the service factor (SF). This result equals the supplied drive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.

4.

Service Factor - Chart 60-A 5. Determine Functionality
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque [SDTT]) to Line 1(the required conveyor drive torque [RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT > RCDT. If not, then: A) Slow down the belt speed B) Choose a wider conveyor C) Consult factory
Hours of Operation per Day 24 2 16 8 2.3 Service Factor 2.2 2.1 2.0 1.9 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Factor

Starts per Hour

Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to use the remaining drive pages.

Example: Equivalent load = 100 (per conveyor technical data page) 100 / 6 = 17 (RCDT) 30 FPM (From page 63 - standard duty top drive - fixed speed) 33 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a top drive) 8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5) 33 / 1.5 = 22 inch lbs. (SDTT) RCDT = 17 SDTT = 22 20 17 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

Example: Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page) 300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT) 50 FPM (From page 65 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed) 87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7) 87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT) RCDT = 50.0 SDTT = 51.1 51.1 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

60

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner. Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.

Mounting Arrangement

Drawings

Drive locations

Sizing information

Voltage

Step 2
125 Series Corrosion Resistant Standard Drives
Side Drive
Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and gearmotor ordering 1 3 information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Side Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43 Torque in Lbs. 88 76 50 41 33 23 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Step 4
Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025-WD

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S3SE-CR Mounting S S S S S S Position* 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 Suffix SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR

Motor Information
HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9

7.20

2.50 3.59 .50 4.35

Prefix Voltage 05 05 05 05 05 05 111111-

Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012

Suffix -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD

3.59

.78

.11

.38

Front View

Top View

Step 1:
Choose mounting arrangement & location
125 Series Corrosion Resistant

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Step 1

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

1

3 Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Remote Drive

Remote Drive
O .28 / 7.20 1.26 4.88 4.23 4.25 .23 1.31 3.50 2.00 .75 3.59 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 3 1 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43 Torque in Lbs. 77 40 27 22 17 12 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-R1SE-CR Mounting R R R R R R Position* 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 Suffix SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-018-WD Prefix 05 05 05 05 05 05 Voltage 111111Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012 Suffix -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 1 1 1 1 1 1

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Top View

1

3

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SE-CR (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 051-120-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor @ 4.5 FPM)

Top Drive
7.51 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the right for mounting package 1 3 and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions. FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive Sizing Information
Torque in Lbs. 88 76 50 41 33 23

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt M1M1M1M1M1M1T T T T T T 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 SESESESESESE5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Suffix -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025-WD Prefix 05 05 05 05 05 05 Voltage 111111Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012 Suffix -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9

Step 2:
Choose speed

3.59 9.50 2.88 3.50

.45 1.75

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

1

3

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Bottom Drive

Bottom Drive
.33 1.75 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43 Torque in Lbs. 77 40 27 22 17 12

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525-CR Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix M1M1M1M1M1M1B B B B B B 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 SESESESESESE5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 120 050 030 025 018 012

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-012-WD Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix 05 05 05 05 05 05 111111120 050 030 025 018 012 -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 1 1 1 1 1 1

Step 3:
Run drive sizing calculations listed on Page 60
63

9.50

3.21 3.50 4.23 3.59

.42

Front View

7.51

Top View

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

1

3
Notes:

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SE-5M2525-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 051-050-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor@ 6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)

62

1. Motors are UL approved 2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Gearmotors include a 6’ cord

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Step 3
Speed Mounting (p. 60) Voltage

Step 4:
Choose voltage requirements

Step 5
Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43 Torque in Lbs. 88 76 50 41 33 23

ant

Step 5:
Put together two part numbers, drive mounting package and gearmotor, by following from left to right

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt M1M1M1M1M1M1T T T T T T 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 SESESESESESE5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Suffix -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025-WD Prefix 05 05 05 05 05 05 Voltage 111111Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012 Suffix -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Torque Timing Pulley Combinations

Gear Reducer

Horsepower
Voltage Key
1 3 V D 115VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller

QC Industries

513.753.6000

61

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Standard Duty Drives

Side Drive
Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and gearmotor ordering 1 3 information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

7.20

2.56 3.59 .50 4.35

3.59

.64

.38

Front View

Top View

1

3

Remote Drive
.28 DIA. 7.20 1.23 4.88 3.59 4.23 4.25 .23 1.32 3.50 2.00 .75 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 3 1 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Front View

Top View

1

3

Top Drive
7.51 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the right for mounting package 1 3 and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

3.59 9.50 2.88 * 3.50 .45 1.75 3.59

Front View

Top View

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

1

3

Bottom Drive
.33 1.75 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

9.50

3.21 3.50 4.23 .42 3.59

7.51

Front View

Top View

1

3

62

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Side Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43 Torque in Lbs. 88 69 38 32 25 18 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S3SE-CR Mounting S S S S S S Position* 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 Suffix SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025-WD Prefix Voltage 05 05 05 05 05 05 111111Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012 Suffix -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Remote Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43 Torque in Lbs. 88 69 38 32 25 18 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-R1SE-CR Mounting R R R R R R Position* 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 Suffix SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR SE-CR

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-018-WD Prefix 05 05 05 05 05 05 Voltage 111111Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012 Suffix -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SE-CR (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 051-120-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor @ 4.5 FPM)

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43 Torque in Lbs. 88 69 38 32 25 18

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt M1M1M1M1M1M1T T T T T T 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 SESESESESESE5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Suffix -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-025-WD Prefix 05 05 05 05 05 05 Voltage 111111Ratio 120 050 030 025 018 012 Suffix -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Bottom Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 4.5 10 18 21 30 43 Torque in Lbs. 88 69 38 32 25 18

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525-CR GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix Belt Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix M1M1M1M1M1M1B B B B B B 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 1 or 3 SESESESESESE5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR

Motor Part Number
Example: 051-012-WD Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix 05 05 05 05 05 05 111111120 050 030 025 018 012 -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19 1/19

Motor Information
Voltage 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV 115v 1PH TENV AMP 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Notes:

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SE-5M2525-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 051-050-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor@ 6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)

1. Motors are UL, CSA and CE approved 2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque

Gearmotors include a 6’ cord

QC Industries

513.753.6000

63

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Heavy Duty Drives
Side Drive
B DIA. .48 ** A 1.77 ** Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor perpendicular with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and 1-J gearmotor ordering 3-G information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

B DIA.

4.14

1.34 .87 3.89

Front View

Top View

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.

1-J

3-G

Remote Drive
2.75 B DIA. B DIA. Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor perpendicular with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 1-G right for mounting package 3-J and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

2.50 ** .85 5.72

.44 DIA.

3.75

2.88

Front View
Note: 56 frame gearmotors extend below gearbox mounting plate and may require shimming

Top View

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.

1-G

3-J

Top Drive
1.86 B DIA. B DIA. A 9.50 5.68 ** 3.50 1.75 .38 Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 1-J right for mounting package 3-G and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1.37

Front View

Top View

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.

1-J

3-G

Bottom Drive
1.75 .33 ** B DIA. 9.50 A Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 1-G right for mounting package 3-J and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

5.30

3.50 1.86 B DIA. .37

1.37

Front View

Top View

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page. Motor Dimension Chart The motor can be rotated in 90O increments to achieve alternate orientations when attaching it to the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when deciding where the motor capacitor and gearbox will be located. 501 A B 13.85 6.15 503 13.22 6.19 50V 15.84 4.98

1-G

3-J

503 (ID) 14.08 7.23

64

QC Industries

513.753.6000

**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - Side Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 60 120 Torque in Lbs. 120 128 132 130 128 107 82 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S1J0-CR Mounting S S S S S S S Position* 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G Suffix 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR

Motor Part Number
Example: 501 - 50J-WD Gearbox Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix Hand G or J 50 1,3,V, D- 50 -WD 50 59 50 50 50 50 1,3,V ,D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V,D1,3,V, D40 30 20 15 10 05 G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD HP 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 DC Amp 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Face 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed -Remote Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 60 120 Torque in Lbs. 120 128 132 130 128 107 82 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S1J0-CR Mounting R R R R R R R Position* 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J Suffix 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR 0-CR Prefix 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

Motor Part Number
Example: 501 - 50J-WD Voltage 1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, DRatio 50 40 30 20 15 10 05 Gearbox Suffix Hand G or J -WD G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD -WD Voltage Key
1 3 V D 115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller

Motor Information
Voltage HP 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 DC Amp 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Face 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - Top or Bottom Drive Sizing Information
Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 95 95 98 93 89 87 84 89 67 82 68 59 51 46

For optional AC controls, see p. 66 For optional AC controls, see p. 66 See controller on p. 66 Customer to supply controller

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3J0-5M2525-CR

Motor Part No.
Example: 503-05J-WD Gearbox Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand Suffix 50 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J -WD 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 1,3,V, D- 40 1,3,V, D- 30 1,3,V, D- 20 1,3,V, D- 15 1,3,V, D- 15 1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V D, 1,3,V D, 10 10 10 05 05 05 05 05 G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD G or J -WD HP

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 DC Amp Amp Amp Face 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 56C 5 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 175 200 225

Prefix Mounting Position* M1M1M1M1M1M1M1M1M1M1M1M1M1M1T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B T or B
1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G 1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

Suffix 00000000000000-

Belt 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M 5M

GMtr. Sprkt Conv SprktSuffix 25 25 25 25 25 30 25 30 40 25 30 34 40 44 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR CR -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR -CR

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Notes:

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 501-10J-WD (115V 1Ph Gearmotor@100 FPM)

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon running torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number (230 VAC 3 PH motors only) 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

See Drive Accessories (page 66) for optional controllers

QC Industries

513.753.6000

65

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Drive Accessories
Drive Accessories
5.63 .188 7.20 6.35 .85
Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Forward/Off/Reverse switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38

2.12

2 X .75 NPT

56 1.20

NEMA 4X DC Control

Washdown DC Control

2.20

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

5.63 .188 7.20 6.35 .85

Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Run/Stop switch Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-37

2.12

2 X .75 NPT

56 1.20

NEMA 4X AC Control

Washdown AC Control

2.20

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Drive Shaft Extensions and Couplings

2.50 A

LE NG

TH

1/2 HEX 7/ 8 1 1/ 4 1.62 1/2

Single Piece Flex Coupling
125R-0009-03 couplings pictured

B

Drive Extension Shafts
Length Part No. 125R-0005-23 125R-0005-35 125R-0005-47 125R-0005-59 125R-0005-71 125R-0005-83 125R-0005-95

Part Number The Single Piece Flex Coupling is used to couple the remote mounted motor with the conveyor drive shaft. This coupling can also be used to couple between gang driven conveyors.

A

B

**Torque Rating (Inch Lbs.)

23 in. The Drive Extension Shaft can be used to gang drive multiple conveyors and/or for power take-off of remote drives. 35 in. 47 in. 59 in. 71 in.

125R-0009-02 .5 in. dia. .5 in. dia. 125R-0009-03 .5 in. dia. .5 hex

78 78 78

125R-0009-08* .5 in. dia. .472 dia.

83 in. 95 in.

*For use with corrosion resistant standard duty drives only **Value based on non-reversing applications with an angular offset of up to 5O.

66

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Automation Accessories
90O Transfer Plate Inline Transfer Plate

Conveyor Width 2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in. Note 1: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction or cleated belts. Note 2: Discharge conveyor must be pushing. Note 3: Customer to drill screw holes to mount plate.

Part No. 125R-0230-02 125R-0230-03 125R-0230-04 125R-0230-06 125R-0230-08 125R-0230-10 125R-0230-12 125R-0230-18 125R-0230-24

Conveyor Width 2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

Part No. 125-0220-02 125-0220-03 125-0220-04 125-0220-06 125-0220-08 125-0220-10 125-0220-12 125-0220-18 125-0220-24

Note: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction or cleated belts.

Pivot Mount Set
Note: The pivot mount attaches to the tail end of the conveyor and enables a pivot point from which other devices can lift the conveyor. Includes left and right hand mount

To Order: Part No. 125R-0172-00

Adjustable Stops
To Order:

Adjustable Diverters

Note: 1. Select an adjustable stop for 1” sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot (See pages 54 & 56) 2. Using the chart below, fill in the part number using the nominal width of the conveyor for the last two digits of the part number Part No. 1” Sides 2” Sides Single Tee Slot Example: 125R-0232-04 End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has 1” aluminum side rails with wear strip 125R-0232-WW 125R-0234-WW 125R-0233-WW To Order: Part No. 125R-0250-000 The adjustable diverter comes with a 5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2) mounting assemblies that the user can utilize to help orient the product around a 90O transfer.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

67

125 Z Series

Z Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 54” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple cleat heights available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42 W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

.75

6.13 W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.
W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY C .88 B ANGLE°

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

1.89

ANGLE°

.82 A

68

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

Z Track
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angle idler assembly that offers users a way to gain control over belt tracking at the angles of incline or decline • Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly for belt installation and tracking adjustments at the angles of incline or decline and locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-term performance • Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured and produced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that is well-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at the angles of incline or decline

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

69

125 Z Series

L Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 36” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple cleat heights available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42 W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

.75 W + 2.33 .50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY 1.00 SHAFT LENGTH .88 6.13 B

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.
W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

1.89

ANGLE°

.82 A

70

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

Z Track
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angle idler assembly that offers users a way to gain control over belt tracking at the angles of incline or decline • Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly for belt installation and tracking adjustments at the angles of incline or decline and locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-term performance • Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured and produced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that is well-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at the angles of incline or decline

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

71

125 Z Series

R Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 36” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple Cleat Heights Available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42 W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

.76

6.13

W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY A B ANGLE° .82 W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH .88

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

1.89

72

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features Features &Features Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

Z Track
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angle idler assembly that offers users a way to gain control over belt tracking at the angles of incline or decline • Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly for belt installation and tracking adjustments at the angles of incline or decline and locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-term performance • Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured and produced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that is well-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at the angles of incline or decline

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

73

125 Z Series

U Special Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 54” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple cleat heights available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42 W - .10 = BELT WIDTH .75 .50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY 6.13 .88 1.89 .82 A C W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

ANGLE° W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

ANGLE°

B

74

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

Z Track
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angle idler assembly that offers users a way to gain control over belt tracking at the angles of incline or decline • Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly for belt installation and tracking adjustments at the angles of incline or decline and locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-term performance • Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured and produced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that is well-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at the angles of incline or decline

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

75

125 Z Series N Special Conveyors
Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 54” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple cleat heights available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42 W - .10 BELT

.75 W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

B

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

ANGLE°

1.89

ANGLE° 6.13

.82 W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

A

C .88

76

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

Z Track
• Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angle idler assembly that offers users a way to gain control over belt tracking at the angles of incline or decline • Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly for belt installation and tracking adjustments at the angles of incline or decline and locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-term performance • Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured and produced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that is well-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at the angles of incline or decline

Tail Assembly
• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

QC Industries

513.753.6000

77

125 Z Series Conveyors
Selecting the Frame Arrangement
Pages 78 through 81 should be used to size, select, and compile a part number. Please use the steps below to begin the process

Z
See steps below

L
See steps below

R
See steps below

U
Consult Factory

N
Consult Factory

Example
1b

Choose an infeed height

1a 1b

1a 1b

12” 24”

1a

Choose an infeed length (if Z or L) in 6” increments

2b

Choose a discharge height
2a

2a 2b

2a 2b

48” 18”

Choose a discharge length (if Z or R) in 6” increments

3

Determine rise (the difference between the discharge and infeed heights) in inches 2a - 1a

3

48” -12” 36”

3

36”

Select the angle and enter the constant from the table below
4

Angle Constant (K)

30O 45O .5 .7

60O 75O .87 .97

90O 1

4

45O

4

.7

Determine the last frame section length (Rise/K) + 2 Choose a frame length in 6” increments Recalculate discharge height ((Step 5 - 2) * K) + 1a
2a

5

(36 / .7) + 2 = 53.4 (Round up to a 6” increment)

5

54”

((54 - 2) * .7) + 12 = 48.4

2a
(Revised)

If new height is not acceptable, choose a different length (in 6” increments) for the center frame section and recalculate. If the center frame section is changed, please check the discharge length in step 2b for proper distance.

2a

48.4”

Use the values from 1b, 2b, and 5 in the length section of the conveyor part number. See page 80. To Determine the Conveyor Floor Length Run*
*This section is provided to allow the user to determine the overall floor space. It is not necessary information for placing an order.
Key a = a frame length b = b frame length c = c frame length y = rise x = run AO = angle Q = overall length
b y A° x c

Example for Z

1) 2)
a

Solve for X Solve for Q For a Z: For an L: For an R:

X=

b2 - y2

1) 2)

542 - 362 24 +40.25 +18 - 6 =76.25

= 40.25

Q

Q = (A + X + C) - 6 Q = (A + X) - 4 Q = (B + X) -4

78

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Technical Data

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 79-A
All applications require certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses these parameters into a common factor called Equivalent Load. For instance, a conveyor application that is carrying a 5 lb. load up an incline is required to move a load equivalent to more than merely the 5 lbs. of product placed upon the belt. Please follow the 3 steps below to determine the Equivalent Load for your application. These results will then be used to properly size the torque requirement for the gearmotor arrangement. (pages 86-89).
Lbs. 150 135 120 105 90 75 60 45 30 15 67 67 67 67 67 125 125 125 125 125

1. Nominal Load

1.

Enter the load (in pounds) that the conveyor must carry on Line 1. Use Figure 79-A to cross-reference the load calculation with the conveyor’s load carrying capacity; drive pulling or drive pushing. Example: Product is a box weighing 2 lbs. There will be 25 boxes on the conveyor at any one time. 2 lbx x 25 = 50 lb. load. Conveyor width is 12 inches, which is capable of carrying 125 lbs. pulling. (Ref. Figure 79-A)

12 18 24 Belt Width Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D) Note: See page 81 Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

0

8

10

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 79-B
3.5 3.4 3.1 2.8 2.3 1.6

2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

2.

Equivalnt Load Constant

3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5

These applications utilize an incline or decline. Choose a factor from Figure 79-B based upon the angle of incline/decline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line 1 above. Enter the result on Line 2. Example: 50 lb. (nominal load) x 2.3 (45O factor) = 115 lb. load equivalent

3. Frictional Load

3.

0.0 Angle Factor

30 1.6

45 2.3

60 2.8

75 3.1

90 3.4

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be factored into the load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, either add 4 to the conveyor’s width, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 79-C. Enter the result on Line 3. Example: 4 + 12 (Conv Width) x 6 = 96 lb. load equivalent (Ref. Fig. 79-C)

Conveyor Friction - Figure 79-C
200 168 150 Equivalent Load

Equivalent Load

SUM (1 thru 3)

lbs.

132 100 72 84 96

Write down the equivalent load on the application data sheet (found in the back of the catalog). The equivalent load is needed to properly size a gearmotor for the conveyor. (Ref. Gearmotors pages 86-89) Example: 50 lbs. (Step 1) +115 lbs (Step 2) + 96 lbs (Step 3) 261 lbs Equivalent Load Next, proceed to the next page to construct the belt part number.

50 0

Conveyor Width Frictional Load

8 72

10 84

12 96

18 132

24 168

QC Industries

513.753.6000

79

125 Z Series Z Conveyors
How to Order
Step 1
Construction 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”
AO

Step 2
A Section

Step 3
B Section C Section

Step 4
Drive Location

Step 5

Step 6

Frame Style

Drive Pulley

Drive Type
a

# of Cleats

# of Cleats

# of Cleats

Tail Pulley

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Series 1 = 125

Widths
Cleat width when using side rails Cleat width when using corrugated sidewall

Lengths
Frame Lengths
for a, b, and c

Order Code

Angle for AO Order Code

Series

Frame
b

Angle

Width

Width

Belt

Belt

Belt

1 E S Step 1
Drive Type E = End Drive

-

-

-

Construction S = Standard

Frame B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
Custom colors available - contact factory

Frame Style Z = Z Frames R = R Frames L = L Frames
For U & N frame styles, contact factory

Step 2
A B

Width

Order Code 08 10 12 18 24

A- Maximum Part Width 4.20” 6.20” 8.20” 12.92” 18.92”

B - Maximum Part Width 3.56” 5.56” 7.56” 12.24” 18.24”

Note: The nominal width of the conveyor is not usable belt space. Please refer to the drawings and table to determine a width for your application. Option A shows a cleated belt with adjustable guide rails (see page 82) while option B shows a cleated belt with corrugated sidewall (see page 81)

Step 3

18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72” 78” 84” 90” 96” 102” 108” 114” 120” 126” 132” 018 024 030 036 042 048 054 060 066 072 078 084 090 096 102 108 114 120 126 132
Example Length:

Angle
30O 45O 60O 75O 90O B C D E F 24”
024C054018
b

18”

45O
° x

54” y
Q

Note: Use the values determined on page 78.
c a AO b a AO b

Note: Total frame sections should not exceed 20’. a + b + c <=20’

80

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Order (continued)
Step 4
Drive Location

Drive Pulley Type A
an St da rd
Cap Solid Output Shaft 1/2” Dia*

Tail Pulley Type S
an St da rd

B

Standard

Q

D C

1/2” Dia* Dual Output

1/2” Dia*

D

n io 42 pt g. Oep se

Detectable

D

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 5
Choose three digit belt ordering code
1/2” High Cleat 3/4” High Cleat 1” High Cleat 2” High Cleat 3” High Cleat 2” High Angled Cleat 1” High Corrugated Sidewall with 1” High Cleat

20˚ .20 .20 .20 .20 .20 2.00
1"

3.00

2.00 .13

.50

.75

1.00 ZAG

ZAE

ZAF

ZAI

ZAK

ZAJ

ZAH*

Example: ZAG = 1” Cleat Height

*Max. incline/decline angle for corrugated sidewall 60O

Step 6
Determine the Number of Cleats 1) Determine endless belt length (Solve for N) ((a + b + c) x 2) - 8 = N Determine number of cleats N/ Desired spacing Example: 160/6= 27
As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pretensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Certain conveyor lengths and configurations will ship unassembled. Accessories such as Drives, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

Z

2)

1)

L
2)

Determine endless belt length (Solve for N) ((a + b) x 2) - 4 = N Determine number of cleats N/Desired spacing

1)

Determine endless belt length (Solve for N) ((a + b) x 2) - 4 = N Determine number of cleats N/ Desired spacing

R
2)

Example: a = 24”, b = 36”, c = 24” Cleat spacing desired = 6” Overall belt length = (24 + 36 + 24) x 2 = 168 - 8 = 160 Total # of cleats is 160/6 = 27 (rounded to nearest odd number)

Order Code Example: ZAG027

Example: 1ESBZ12-024C054018-BSQ-ZAG031 125 Z Series conveyor with powder coated frame, “Z” style, 12” wide with 24” horizontal section inclining at 45O for 54”, changing to a horizontal section for 18”. Drive is located in position “B” using a standard drive pulley and standard tail pulley. Belt is a standard urethane belt with (31) 1” high cleats on approximately 6” cleat-to-cleat centers.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

81

125 Z Series Adjustable Guide Rails
Adjustable Guide Rails
W - 3.27* W - 4.55** 2.50 MAX. 1.13 MIN.

The Adjustable Side Rails are used when a guide is required to run the length of the conveyor. Adjustable guide rails are available in 1”, 2”, and 3” heights. The 2” and 3” guide may be used in conjunction with the Flared Sides, End Stop and Hopper (sold separately - reference page 83). To Order:

W + 2.81

2-Axis Adjustable Guides
W + 5.95 For use with cleated belting without corrugated sidewall 1” H Guide Assembly Part# Z-0281- (see table at right) * For 8” - 12” conveyors ** For 18” - 24” conveyors

Z

1” Z-0281-ZA aaa bbb ccc 2” Z-0282-ZA aaa bbb ccc 3” Z-0283-ZA aaa bbb ccc

W - 3.42* W - 4.70**

L
3.25 MAX. 1.99 MIN. 4.34

1” Z-0281-LA aaa bbb 2” Z-0282-LA aaa bbb 3” Z-0283-LA aaa bbb

R
W + 2.81 W + 5.95 2” H Guide Assembly Part# Z-0282- (see table at right) * For 8” - 12” conveyors ** For 18” - 24” conveyors

1” Z-0281-RA aaa bbb 2” Z-0282-RA aaa bbb 3” Z-0283-RA aaa bbb

Example: Z-0281-ZB0360720018 1” high guide assembly for a 30O Z style conveyor that has a 36” infeed, 72” rise, and 18” discharge

W - 3.55* W - 4.83**

Part Number Key 5.25 MAX. 3.00 MIN. 4.34 A = Angle B = 30 C = 45O D = 60O E = 75O F = 90O
O

a,b,c = Frame Sections aaa = a Section Length bbb = b Section Length ccc = c Section Length* *Not necessary for R or L conveyors

W + 2.81 W + 5.95 3” H Guide Assembly Part# Z-0283- (see table at right) * For 8” - 12” conveyors ** For 18” - 24” conveyors

W - 4.43 * W - 5.71 **

When the end user requires a conveyor with corrugated sidewall belting and a flared side, end chute or hopper, this guide rail is needed. It provides a 2” high side rail and the necessary mounting to support the flared sides, end chutes and hopper (sold separately - reference page 83). The guiderail incorporates a 2-axis adjustment that allows raising the side rail above the corrugated sidewall, providing a precise “drop zone” into the cleat pocket. To Order:

W + .31

Part Number: 125-0282-LLL-S*

2” high 2-Axis Adjustable Guide Rail

Infeed Guide
For use with corrugated sidewall belting

W + 4.31 * For 8” - 12” conveyors ** For 18” - 24” conveyors

*The guide rail length should equal the length of the flared side rail, which is ordered separately (reference page 83). The guide rail is only required on the infeed frame a-section (reference conveyor ordering page 80).

82

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Flared Side Rails & Hoppers
W + 2.38 W + 1.10* 45° 4.98 W - 3.42 W - 4.70 * L

Flared Side Rails are ideal for applications that require a “drop zone” wider than the width of the conveyor. The flared side rails attach to the 2-Axis Adjustable Guides or the Infeed Guide rails, sold separately and shown on page 82.

To Order: 2.00 MAX CLEAT HEIGHT W + .31 W + 1.38 W + .10* 45° Z-1004-012 Z-1004-018 Z-1004-024 Z-1004-030 Z-1004-036 Z-1004-042 Z-1004-048 12” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” length length length length length length length

*18” and 24” wide conveyors only

L

Flared Side Rails*
5.94
*Flared Sides must be mounted to the 2-Axis Adjustable Guides sold separately on pg. 82.

W - 4.44 W - 5.72*

Example: (1) Z-1004-024 A set of 24” long flared side rails
Note: Flared sides must be at least 6” shorter than the frame section length

1.00 MAX CLEAT & C.S.W. HEIGHT W + .31

*18” and 24” wide conveyors only

W + 3.75 W + 2.47 *

2.90 20°

5.06

End Stops are used in conjunction with the Flared Side Rails. Stops are adjustable down the length of the Flared Rail and include a UHMW flap to help prevent parts from dropping off the end of the conveyor.

W - 3.50 W - 4.78 * W + .31 W + 2.75 W + 1.47* 3.10 20°

To Order: *18” and 24” wide conveyors only Width 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” Part No. Z-0234-08 Z-0234-10 Z-0234-12 Z-0234-18 Z-0234-24 Part No.* Z-0234-CSW-08 Z-0234-CSW-10 Z-0234-CSW-12 Z-0234-CSW-18 Z-0234-CSW-24

End Stops*
6.03

*Note: Use the part number that contains “CSW” when your conveyor utilizes a Corrugated Sidewall belt material. (Belt ordering code: ZAH)

* End Stops must be mounted to flared sides as shown above. Flared sides sold separately.

W - 4.50 W - 5.78* W + .31

*18” and 24” wide conveyors only

Example: Z-0234-12 One end stop for a conveyor without a corrugated sidewall belt

L 2.90 2.90

Hopper assemblies are created by ordering (2) End Stops. The stops can be easily placed anywhere along the length of the flared rails to create a hopper of varying size. To Order: Order a quantity of (2) to make a hopper Width 8” 10” 12” 18” 24” Part No. Z-0234-08 Z-0234-10 Z-0234-12 Z-0234-18 Z-0234-24 Part No.* Z-0234-CSW-08 Z-0234-CSW-10 Z-0234-CSW-12 Z-0234-CSW-18 Z-0234-CSW-24

L 3.10 3.10

Adjustable Hopper*
* Hopper must be mounted to flared sides as shown above. Flared sides sold separately.

*Note: Use the part number that contains “CSW” when your conveyor utilizes a Corrugated Sidewall belt material.

Example: Z-0234-12 (Quantity: 2) Two end stops, which create a hopper for a conveyor without a corrugated sidewall belt

QC Industries

513.753.6000

83

125 Z Series Stands

Aluminum Stand (for infeed heights greater than 9”)

Discharge

Infeed

Infeed Stand

Cross Tie

Discharge Stand

With Feet

To Order: Based upon the calculations performed on page 78, choose your infeed and discharge stands using the tables below: Infeed Stand Legend Prefix 2234 2234 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 Type* F or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or C*Feet or Caster

Discharge Stand Legend Width*** WW WW WW WW WW WW WW WW WW WW Prefix 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 Type* F or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or C*Feet or Caster

Low TOB** High TOB** 912151821242730333612151821242730333639-

Low TOB** High TOB** 24273033363942454851542730333639424548515457-

Width*** WW WW WW WW WW WW WW WW WW WW WW
**Nominal Conveyor Width

**TOB = Top of Belt

***Nominal Conveyor Width

Example: 2234F-12-15-10 Aluminum stand with feet for 10” wide conveyor with infeed of 12” to 15” Note: Infeed stand legs with prefix 2234 extend beyond the conveyor framework

**TOB = Top of Belt

Example: 2233C-30-33-12 Aluminum stand with caster for 12” wide conveyor with discharge of 30” to 33”

Aluminum Cross Ties
Aluminum cross ties are used when infeed height is above 18”. For heights below 18”, use the Z cross brace (see page 85). Part No. 125 - 0235 LLL

To order:
Cross Ties - Available Lengths Inches 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144” LLL 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144

Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties. Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to length because of stand placement variations.

Example: 125-0235-024

84

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Aluminum Stand (for infeed heights 9” or less)

Discharge

Infeed

Infeed Stand

Z Cross Brace

Discharge Stand

With Caster

To Order: Based upon the calculations performed on page 78, choose your infeed and discharge stands using the tables below: Infeed Stand Legend Prefix 2235 2235 Type* F or CF or C*Feet or Caster

Discharge Stand Legend Prefix 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 2233 Type* F or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or CF or C*Feet or Caster

Low TOB** High TOB** 366 9
**TOB = Top of Belt

Low TOB** High TOB** 15182124273033361821242730333639-

Width*** WW WW WW WW WW WW WW WW
***Nominal Conveyor Width

Example: 2235F-3-6 Aluminum stand with feet for any conveyor with infeed of 3” to 6”

Note: Infeed stand legs extend beyond the conveyor framework

**TOB = Top of Belt

Example: 2233C-36-39-12 Aluminum stand with caster for 12” wide conveyor with discharge of 36” to 39”

Z Cross Brace
Z Cross Braces are used when the conveyor’s infeed height is below 18”. When it is above 18”, use Aluminum Cross Tie (see page 84). Y Specifications: 1) Z and R style conveyors:

Y < 36” (ref. drawing) = Use the 18” Z Cross Brace Y > 36 and < 54” (ref. drawing) = Use the 36” Z Cross Brace Use the 18” Z Cross Brace

2) L style conveyors (all): L To Order: Part Number: Z-0235-018 Z-0235-035

18” Z Cross Brace 36” Z Cross Brace

QC Industries

513.753.6000

85

125 Z Series Drives
Drive Sizing Technical Data
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data page (page 79). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)

1.

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from page 79). Divide this number by 6. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT)

2.

Choose the belt speed from page 89, and write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use either a timing belt or a chain. The drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.

3. Select Service Class and Enter Service Factor (SF)
Select a service class:

Service Class (I or II)

3.

Class I - Moderate loads with chain and sprocket or direct drive Class II - Moderate loads with belt and pulley Now select the service factor (SF) from Chart 86-A below based upon hours of operation per day and number of starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.

4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT)
Divide the drive train torque (DTT) from #2 by the service factor (SF) from #3. This result equals the supplied drive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.

4.

Service Factor - Chart 86-A 5. Determine Functionality
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque [SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque [RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT RCDT. If not, then:
Service Factor Hours of Operation per Day 24 2 16 8 2.3 2.2 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Class II

A) Slow down the belt speed B) Choose a wider conveyor C) Consult factory

2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7

Class I

Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to use the remaining drive pages.

Starts and Stops per Hour

Example: Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page) 300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT) 50 FPM (From page 89 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed) 87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7) 87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT) RCDT = 50.8 SDTT = 51.1 51.1 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

86

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner. Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.

Mounting Arrangement

Drawings

Drive locations

Sizing information

Voltage

125 Z Series Heavy Duty Drives

Step 3
Fixed or Variable Speed
Side Drive
B DIA.* Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and 1-J gearmotor ordering 3-G information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Step 5
Heavy Duty Electric
Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S1J0 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1M1Mounting S S S S S S S Position* 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G Suffix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prefix 16 16 16 25 25 33 50

Step 1:
Choose mounting arrangement & location

Side Drive
B DIA. * 4.14 .48 1.77 A*

Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 60 120 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120 128 132 130 128 107 82

Motor Part Number
Example: 161 - 50J Gearbox Voltage Ratio Hand 1,3,V,D50 G or J 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D40 30 20 15 10 05 G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J HP

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1.3/6 1.3/6 1.3/6 1.3/6 1.3/6 1.6/8 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 3.5 5 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C

1/6 3.6/1.9 1/6 3.6/1.9 1/6 3.6/1.9 1/4 4.6/2.6 1/4 4.6/2.6 1/3 7.2/3.6

1.34 .87 3.89

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Top View

1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

1-J

3-G

Remote Drive Sizing Information Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-R1G0 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1M1Mounting R R R R R R R Position* 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J Suffix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prefix 16 16 16 25 25 33 50

Step 1

Motor Part Number
Example: 251-20G Voltage 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,DRatio 50 40 30 20 15 10 05 Gearbox Hand G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J HP 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/3 1/2

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 7.2/3.6 1.3/6 1.3/6 1.3/6 1.3/6 1.3/6 11.6/8 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 3.5 5 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C

Remote Drive
Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 3-J 1-G right for mounting package and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions. FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 60 120 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120 128 132 130 128 107 82

Step 2:
If top or bottom drive mounting arrangement, choose timing belt or chain drive
Note: Each speed has two rows. The top row is timing belt driven, and the bottom row is chain driven

B DIA. * A* 2.75 2.88

B DIA. * .44 DIA. .50 DIA.

1.74 3.75 2.88

1.12

8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Front View
*42 frame motors only *For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Top View

1-G

3-J

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S3G0 (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)

Voltage Key
1 115 VAC 1 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 90 3 230/460 VAC 3 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 90 V 90 VDC w/controller See controller on p. 90 D 90 VDC w/o controller Customer to supply controller

Top Drive
1.86 B DIA.* B DIA. * Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the A* drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-J mounting package and 3-G gearmotor ordering 1.37 information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Top or Bottom Drive
Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 175 200 225 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 95 (belt) 120 (chain) 95 (belt) 128 (chain) 98 (belt) 132 (chain) 93 (belt) 130 (chain) 89 (belt) 128 (chain 87 (belt) 107 (chain) 84 (belt) 107 (chain) 89 (belt) 100 (chain) 67 (belt) 67 (chain) 82 (belt) 82 (chain) 68 (belt) 68 (chain) 59 (belt) 59 (chain) 51 (belt) 51 (chain) 46 (belt) 46 (chain)

Fixed or Variable Speed
Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 30 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 12 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 40 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 34 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 14 5M 25 40 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 25 44 1J, 1G, 3J M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 18
*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No.
Example: 503-05J Prefix Voltage 16 16 16 25 25 25 33 33 33 50 50 50 50 50 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V D, 1,3,V ,DRatio 50 40 30 20 15 15 10 10 10 05 05 05 05 05 Gearbox Hand G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J HP

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 7.2/3.6 7.2/3.6 7.2/3.6 8.8/4.4 8.8/4.4 8.8/4.4 8.8/4.4 8.8/4.4 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.6/.8 1.6/.8 1.6/.8 2.0/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.0/1.0 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5 5 5 5 5 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

9.50

5.68 ** 3.50

1.75

.38

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Top View

1-J

3-G

Bottom Drive
1.75 .33 B DIA.* Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-G mounting package and 3-J gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

9.50

5.30

A*

Step 3:
Choose speed

3.50 1.86 B DIA. * .38

1.37

Front View
*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right The motor can be rotated in 90 O increments when attaching it to the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when deciding where the motor capacitor and work box will be located.

Top View

1-G

3-J

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Motor Dimension Chart 161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 6.19 50V 503 (ID) 4.98 7.23 Notes: A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)

88

QC Industries

513.753.6000

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon rimmomg torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460 VAC 3 PH motors only 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

QC Industries

See Drive Accessories pages (p. 90 & 91) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

513.753.6000

89

Step 4:
Speed Mounting Voltage
D 90 VDC w/o controller Customer to supply controller

Step 4
(p. 86)

Run drive sizing calculations listed on Page 86

Top or Bottom Drive
Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 175 200 225 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 95 (belt) 120 (chain) 95 (belt) 128 (chain) 98 (belt) 132 (chain) 93 (belt) 130 (chain) 89 (belt) 128 (chain 87 (belt) 107 (chain) 84 (belt) 107 (chain) 89 (belt) 100 (chain) 67 (belt) 67 (chain) 82 (belt) 82 (chain) 68 (belt) 68 (chain) 59 (belt) 59 (chain) 51 (belt) 51 (chain) 46 (belt) 46 (chain)

Fixed or Variable Speed

Step 6

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 30 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 12 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 40 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 34 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 14 5M 25 40 1J, 1G, 3J M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 25 44 1J, 1G, 3J M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 18
*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No.
Example: 503-05J Prefix Voltage 16 16 16 25 25 25 33 33 33 50 50 50 50 50 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V D, 1,3,V ,DRatio 50 40 30 20 15 15 10 10 10 05 05 05 05 05 Gearbox Hand G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J HP

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 7.2/3.6 7.2/3.6 7.2/3.6 8.8/4.4 8.8/4.4 8.8/4.4 8.8/4.4 8.8/4.4 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.6/.8 1.6/.8 1.6/.8 2.0/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.0/1.0 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 5 5 5 5 5 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

Step 5:
Choose voltage requirements

Step 6:
Put together two part numbers, drive mounting package and gearmotor, by following from left to right

Voltage Key
1 115VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller 3 V D

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Step 2

Motor Part No. Example: 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)

Notes:

Torque

Sprocket/Timing Pulley Combinations

Gear Reducer

Horsepower

QC Industries

513.753.6000

87

125 Z Series Heavy Duty Drives

Side Drive
B DIA.* B DIA. * 4.14 .48 1.77 A* Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and 1-J gearmotor ordering 3-G information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1.34 .87 3.89

Front View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

Top View

1-J

3-G

Remote Drive
Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 3-J 1-G right for mounting package and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

B DIA. * A* 2.75 2.88

B DIA. * .44 DIA. .50 DIA.

1.74 3.75 2.88

1.12

Front View
Note: 56 frame gear motors extend below gear box mounting plate and may require shimming

Top View

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

1-G

3-J

Top Drive
1.86 B DIA.* B DIA. * Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-J mounting package and 3-G gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

A* 9.50 5.68 ** 3.50 1.75 .38

1.37

Front View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

Top View

1-J

3-G

Bottom Drive

**Dimension reflects top of belt

1.75

.33

B DIA.*

9.50

5.30

A*

3.50 1.86 B DIA. * .38

1.37

Front View
*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page The motor can be rotated in 90O increments when attaching it to the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when deciding where the motor capacitor and work box will be located.

Top View

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-G mounting package and 3-J gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1-G

3-J

Motor Dimension Chart 161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 6.19 50V 503 (ID) 4.98 7.23 A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20 5.01 6.15

88

Fixed or Variable Speed
Side Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 60 120 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120 128 132 130 128 107 82 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Heavy Duty Electric

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-S1J0 Mounting S S S S S S S Position* 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G 1J or 3G Suffix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Motor Part Number
Example: 161 - 50J Prefix Voltage Ratio Gearbox Hand 16 1,3,V,D50 G or J 16 16 25 25 33 50 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D40 30 20 15 10 05 G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 3.2 4.8 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Remote Drive Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 60 120 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120 128 132 130 128 107 82 Prefix M1M1M1M1M1M1M1-

Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-R1G0 Mounting R R R R R R R Position* 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J 1G or 3J Suffix 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Prefix 16 16 16 25 25 33 50

Motor Part Number
Example: 251-20G Voltage 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,DRatio 50 40 30 20 15 10 05 Gearbox Hand G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/3 1/2 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 3.2 4.8 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S3J0 (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)

Voltage Key
1 3 V D 115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller For optional AC controls, see p. 90 For optional AC controls, see p. 90 See controller on p. 90 Customer to supply controller

Top or Bottom Drive
Sizing Information
FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 175 200 225 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 95 (belt) 120 (chain) 95 (belt) 128 (chain) 98 (belt) 132 (chain) 93 (belt) 130 (chain) 89 (belt) 128 (chain 87 (belt) 107 (chain) 84 (belt) 107 (chain) 89 (belt) 100 (chain) 67 (belt) 67 (chain) 82 (belt) 82 (chain) 68 (belt) 68 (chain) 59 (belt) 59 (chain) 51 (belt) 51 (chain) 46 (belt) 46 (chain)

Fixed or Variable Speed
Mounting Part Number
Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 30 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 12 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 40 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 34 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 14 5M 25 40 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 25 44 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 18
*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No.
Example: 503-05J Prefix Voltage 16 16 16 25 25 25 33 33 33 50 50 50 50 50 1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V,D1,3,V D, 1,3,V ,DRatio 50 40 30 20 15 15 10 10 10 05 05 05 05 05 Gearbox Hand G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/3 1/3 1/3 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 4.6/2.6 2.5/2.8 2.5/2.8 2.5/2.8 7.4/3.7 7.4/3.7 7.4/3.7 7.4/3.7 7.4/3.7 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.5/0.7 1.5/0.7 1.5/0.7 2.1/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.1/1.0 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) Notes:

Motor Part No. Example: 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon running torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460VAC 3ph motors only. 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

QC Industries

See Drive Accessories pages (p. 90 & 91) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

513.753.6000

89

125 Z Series Drive Accessories
Motor Controls
6.00 5.00 3X .19 DIA. 115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1/2 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 1 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 1 Enclosure Forward/Reverse switch, Run/Brake switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-01 125-0149-09* Specifications/Features:

8.00

5.00

3.45

1.25

Standard NEMA 1DC Control Wiring: cords & plugs

Standard DC Control
2X .88 DIA. 2.50 Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

*Includes 8’ cord from control to AC plug and 8’ cord from control to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).

2.84 2.40

4.45

Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1/3 phase, 50/60 hz input, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc/CE IP 20 Enclosure 3-digit LED display Forward/Reverse switch Run/Stop button, Accel/Decel buttons Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number:* 125-0054-5C-11-05 125-0054-5C-21-05 125-0054-5C-23-20 125-0054-5C-43-10

4.57

5.73

5.13

4X .18 DIA.

.34

115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20

Standard AC Control
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63 Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Forward/Off/Reverse switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38

.19 7.20 6.35 .85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

NEMA 4X DC Control

Washdown DC Control

2.20

1.20

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63 Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Run/Stop switch Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-37

.19 7.20 6.35 .85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

NEMA 4X AC Control

Washdown AC Control

2.20

1.20

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

90

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Motion Controls
.25 DIA. 3.63 The Motor Starter is an overload protection that also provides a means of using a Remote E-Stop for safety. The starter is equipped with an undervoltage trip to protect against autostarting after the overload condition has been corrected. Also includes short circuit protection. Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max 230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max 460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max UL/CSA/CE Start/Stop buttons IP55 Enclosure To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38-115 125-0054-38-230 125-0054-38-460

5.13

5.75

2.00 .72

4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT

Motor Starter
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure

TURN TO RELEASE E-STOP 2.50 3.13

The E-Stop accessory is mounted directly to the Motor Starter enclosure, providing a means of stopping the motor for safety. It can be padlocked for servicing, and contains a start button for restarting the motor after the pushbutton has been released. Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE E-Stop can be locked out/includes start button IP55 Rated Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure

2.25

5.88

LOCK-OUT TAG-OUT To Order: Part Number: ELECT-061 E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter

E-Stop Accessory
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

3.50 2X .22 DIA. 3.00

The Remote E-Stop provides a means for locking out power to the motor for safety. It includes an IP65 enclosure and mounting bracket to allow the E-Stop to be mounted directly to the side of the conveyor frame. Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE IP65 Enclosure To Order: Part Number: ELECT-063-WBRKT

2.67

2.89

2.37 3.76

2.75

E-Stop with enclosure

Remote E-Stop

Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frame Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches

Heavy Duty Motor Options
Part Number 125-0149-05 125-0149-06 125-0149-07 125-0149-09 Description ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor 8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor 8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details

QC Industries

513.753.6000

91

250 Series End Drive Conveyors
Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 3’ to 15’ Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 2.5” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 630 lbs.* Speed Range up to 360 fpm Belt is the highest point on the conveyor
*See Technical Data on page 94

Overview Dimensions

.42 W - .25 = BELT WIDTH

.82 W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W + 4.95

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

.62 DIA. 3/16 KEY L A = (L - D) D

1.38 SHAFT LENGTH

6.19 1.89 * 1.81 FRAME 39.38

4.44

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100.

Note: Conveyors 120” and under are built using a single piece frame

92

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits

Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Tail Assembly
• Multi-point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler ends of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly is designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior sealed ball bearings that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly back-flexing idlers provide axial float, allowing the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the drive assembly though self-aligning bearings, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal

QC Industries

513.753.6000

93

250 Series End Drive Conveyors
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load. A conveyor application that is accumulating a 50 pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 50 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 94-A
700 600 Lbs. 500 400 300 200 100 35 280 210 140 105 105 70 70 52.5 3 4 6 140 175 210 350 420 315 175175 630

1. Nominal Load

1.

0

2

8

10

12

18

24

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 94-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for pushing and pulling applications. The 250 conveyor can carry 35 pounds per inch of width (with the exception of a 24” wide conveyor, which can carry only 175 lbs.) Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

Conveyor Belt Width (in.) Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 95 Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2 (except on the 24” conveyor). Pushing (Drive Location C&D)

2. Accumulation

2.
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 94-B
2.0 Equivalnt Load Constant 1.6 1.5 1.1 1.0 0.6 0.5 0.3 0.8 1.4

If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 100 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane). Enter Accumulation Factor on Line Two.

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

3.

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or declining applications choose a factor from Figure 94-B based upon the angle of incline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. The angle limit is 30 degrees. Enter result on Line Three. **Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 94-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Three. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

STOP

0.0 Angle Factor

5 0.3

10 0.6

15 0.8

20 1.1

25 1.4

30 1.6

4. Conveyor Friction

4.

Conveyor Friction - Figure 94-C
300 250 Equivalent Load 200 150 100 50 0 96 104 112 128 144 176 160 224 272

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 94-C. Enter result on Line Four.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-4)

lbs.

Write down the equivalent load on your application data sheet (found in the back of the catalog). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gear motor for the conveyor. Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

Conveyor Width Frictional Load

2 96

3 104

4 112

6 128

8 144

10 160

12 176

18 224

24 272

94

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Order
Step 1 Construction Frame Style Drive Type
3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”

Step 2
Order Code

Step 3 Drive Location Drive Pulley

Step 4

Tail Pulley

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Frame

Series 2 = 250

Drive Location C D
an St da rd
Cap

Series
A

Width

Width

Belt Belt Belt

2 E S
Step 1

H

-

-

-

Drive Type E = End Drive

Construction S = Standard

Frame B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
Custom colors available - Contact factory

Frame Style H = Straight Frame

Step 2
Widths 2” 02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24 Lengths* 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 132” 156” 180” Order Code S P S S S S S 0 1 1 P P P P P 9 2 4 F F F F F F 6 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 4 6 7 9 2 3 3 3 6 8 0 2 6 0 6 6 6

Step 3

*Contact factory for special lengths. Lengths 120” and under are a single piece frame design.

Drive Pulley Type
an St da rd

Tail Pulley Type

*.625” Dia.

L

Standard

Q

Solid Output Shaft

B
A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

*.625” Dia. Dual Output

*.625” Dia.

Y

*3/16 square key included

Step 4
Choose three-digit belt code on page 100. Example: 2ESBH10-SPF120-ALQ-MAA 250 Series End Drive conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 10” wide by 120” long with solid output drive pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Conveyors longer than 120” ship unassembled. Accessories such as Motors, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

95

250 Series Center Drive Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 4’ to 28’ Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 2.5” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 630 lbs.* Speed Range up to 360 fpm Belt is highest point on conveyor

*See Technical Data on page 98

Overview Dimensions

.42

.82 W - .25 = BELT WIDTH W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W + 4.95

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

.62 DIA. 3/16 KEY L (L - D) /2 D (L - D) /2

1.38 SHAFT LENGTH

1.89 *

1.81 FRAME 54.75

6.19

4.44

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100.

Note: Conveyors 120” and under are built using a single piece frame

96

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features &Features Benefits
Conveyor
• Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Tail Assembly
• Multi-point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler ends of the conveyor

Drive Assembly
• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly is designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior sealed ball bearings that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly back-flexing idlers provide axial float, allowing the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the drive assembly though self-aligning bearings, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal

QC Industries

513.753.6000

97

250 Series Center Drive Conveyors
Technical Data
Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load. A conveyor application that is accumulating a 50 pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 50 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.
Lbs.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 98-A

700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 70 2 105 3 140 280 210 350 420

630

1. Nominal Load

1.

175

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 98-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for pushing and pulling applications. The 250 conveyor can carry 35 pounds per inch of width (with the exception of a 24” wide conveyor, which can carry only 175 lbs.) Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

4

6

8

10

12

18

24

Conveyor Belt Width (in.)

2. Accumulation

2.
Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 98-B
2.0 Equivalnt Load Constant 1.6 1.5 1.1 1.0 0.6 0.5 0.0 0.0 Angle Factor 0 0.0 5 0.3 10 0.6 15 0.8 20 1.1 25 1.4 30 1.6 0.3 0.8 1.4

If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 100 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane). Enter Accumulation Factor on Line Two.

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

3.

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or declining applications choose a factor from Figure 98-B based upon the angle of incline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. The angle limit is 30 degrees. Enter result on Line Three. **Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 98-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Three. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor.

STOP

4. Conveyor Friction

4.
Conveyor Friction - Figure 98-C
300 250 Equivalent Load 200 150 100 50 0 Conveyor Width Frictional Load 2 96 3 104 4 112 6 128 8 144 10 160 12 176 18 224 24 272 96 104 112 128 144 176 160 224

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add (width x 8) + 80, or simply choose the value from Figure 98-C. Enter result on Line Four.

272

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-4)

lbs.

Write down the equivalent load on your application data sheet (found in the back of the catalog). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gear motor for the conveyor. Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

98

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Order
Step 1 Construction Frame Style Drive Type
3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”

Step 2
Order Code

Step 3 Drive Location Drive Pulley

Step 4

Tail Pulley

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Length

Frame

Series 2 = 250

A

Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 100. Example: 2CSBH18-096D096-ALQ-MAA 250 Series Center Drive conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 18” wide by 240” long with solid output drive pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.

Series

Width

Width

Belt Belt Belt

2 C S

H
Step 1

-

-

-

Drive Type C = Center Drive

Construction S = Standard

Frame B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel
Custom colors available - contact factory

Frame Style H = Straight Frame

Step 2
Widths 2” 02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24 Lengths* 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144” 168” 192” 240” 288” 336” Order S S S S S 0 0 0 0 1 1 Code P P P P P 4 6 7 9 2 4 F F F F F 8 0 2 6 0 4 D D D D D D D D D D D 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 6 7 9 2 4 6 7 9 2 4 8 0 2 6 0 8 0 2 6 0 4

*Contact factory for special lengths. Lengths 120” and under are a single piece frame design

Step 3
Drive Location
an St da rd
Cap Solid Output Shaft *.625” Dia.

Drive Pulley Type
an St da rd

Tail Pulley Type

B
*.625” Dia.

L

Standard

Q

*.625” Dia. Dual Output *3/16 square key included

Y

Step 4

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Conveyors longer than 120” ship unassembled. Accessories such as Motor, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

99

250 Series Conveyors
ptio n Top si of F de Coef ricti on ( ficient CoF ) Sho r Max t Term P Tem a pera rt ture Max (°F) . Tem Ambint pera O ture peratin g (°F) Anti -Sta tic Ave ra Thic ge Bel t knes s (in ches )
LOW LOW LOW 212 212 212 176 176 176 YES YES YES 0.075 0.075 0.075 HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH 212 212 194 212 176 176 158 176 NO YES YES YES 0.103 0.145 0.083 0.185 VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW 212 248 140 175 176 212 140 175 YES NO YES YES 0.054 0.051 0.060 0.054 MED LOW MED MED 356 356 300 300 356 356 212 212 YES YES YES YES 0.059 0.051 0.079 0.067 LOW HIGH MED 212 248 176 176 212 176 YES YES YES 0.075 0.083 0.100 LOW LOW LOW MED HIGH MED HIGH LOW MED VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW 212 212 230 248 176 212 212 158 176 175 248 176 176 176 194 212 176 176 212 158 176 175 212 176 YES YES YES YES YES 104e 104e 105e 105e NO NO NO 0.075 0.075 0.055 0.047 0.050 0.063 0.080 0.040 0.100 0.023 0.024 0.040 0.060 0.050 0.075 0.063 0.071 0.070 0.067 0.072 0.098 0.072 0.059 0.059 0.090 0.040 0.078 MED LOW MED MED MED MED MED MED MED HIGH LOW MED MED LOW MED 158 176 212 212 212 175 175 175 302 212 194 356 176 176 212 158 176 176 176 176 175 175 175 248 176 158 356 176 176 176 YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES NO YES

Belt Orde ring Cod e

scri

e De

Top Surf ac

Top Surf ac

e Ma

teria

l

Multi-Purpose Belts A. Standard Urethane MAA B. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard Urethane MAB C. Option #3-Perforated Belt MAD High Friction Belts A. Grey Diamond Top High Adhesion B. Green High Tack PVC C. Black Lateral Grooved High Adhesion D. Black Rough Top High Adhesion Accumulation Belts (Low Friction) A. White FDA Fabric Accumulator C. Black Tight Weave Accumulator D. Grey Textured Urethane Accumulator E. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator Heat-Resistant Belts A. White Silicone Heat Resistor B. White Silicone Translucent Resistor C. Blue Nitrile Heat Resistor D. White Nitrile Heat Resistor Cut Resistant Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Black Dimple Top Cut Resistor C. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor

Smooth Smooth, Sealed Edge Smooth, Perforations

Urethane Urethane Urethane

White White White

YES YES YES

FAA FAB FAD FAF

Snakeskin Matte Longitudinal Groove Rough Top

PVC PVC Soft PVC PVC

Light Grey Dark Green Black Black

NO NO NO NO

AAA AAC AAD AAE

Fabric Fabric Textured Fabric

Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated

White Black Light Grey Dark Green

YES NO NO YES

HAA HAB HAD HAE

Fine Texture Fabric Coarse Structure Smooth

Silicone Silicone Impregnated Nitrile Rubber Nitrile Rubber

White White Blue White

NO NO NO NO

IAB IAC IAD

Smooth Dimple Top Structured

Urethane Hard Urethane Nitrile Rubber

White Black Black

YES NO NO

FDA Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Sealed Edge Standard Urethane C. Pure White FDA D. Woven White FDA E. White FDA Urethane High Adhesion Static Conductive Belts A. Textured Carbon Impregnated B. Accumulation Static Conductive C. Low Friction Static Conductive D. Structured Static Conductive Translucent Belts A. Green Translucent Accumulator B. FDA Fabric Translucent Accumulator C. Silicone Translucent Accumulator Color Contrasting Belts A. Gray Textured Contraster B. Smooth Green Urethane Contraster C. Dark Green PVC Contraster D. Light Blue Urethane Contraster E. Smooth Black PVC Contraster Non-Marking Belts A. Felt Topped Product Protector B. Fabric Topped Product Protector C. Cotton Topped Product Protector D. Black Elastomer Product Protector Release Properties Belts A. Beige Silicone Product Release B. White PVC Product Release C. Textured Silicone Product Release D. Smooth Habilene Product Release E. Smooth Silicone Product Release Specialty/Profile Belts A. Negative Pyramid Profile

UAA UAB UAC UAD UAE EAA EAB EAC EAD TAA TAB TAC

Smooth Smooth, Sealed Edge Matte Smooth Smooth Textured Rough Texture Smooth Structured Textured Fabric Textured Textured Smooth Matte Matte Smooth Felt Fabric Fabric Felt Smooth Matte, Smooth Fine Texture Smooth Textured Textured

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Urethane Impregnated Nitrile Rubber Urethane NBR Impregnated Fleece Impregnated PU Urethane Impregnated Silicone

White White White Translucent White Black Black Black Black Light Green Translucent Translucent

YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES

PAA PAB PAC PAD PAE NAA NAB NAC NAD RAA RAB RAC RAD RAE SAD

PVC Urethane PVC Urethane PVC Felt Spun Polyester Cotton Polyester Silicone Non-Stick PVC Silicone Habilene Silicone Urethane

Grey Green Dark Green Light Blue Black

NO YES NO YES NO

White YES White YES Natural White YES Black NO Beige White White White White White YES YES NO YES YES YES

Chemical Resistant Belts Due to the broad spectrum of chemicals and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in chemical application circumstances. Our application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand the chemicals present as well as the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach delivers the best possible product for the application.

100

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Specifications subject to change - consult factory

FDA

Belt Selection Guide

Belt Colo r

QC Industries offers conveyor belting for a wide variety of applications and industries. These pages cover a number of the more popular belts we have provided through the years. These belts have all been tested at QC Industries and offer a compatible fit to the 250
Multi-Purpose Belts

Series conveyors. If you have a specific need that is not covered on these pages, please contact one of our sales engineers directly at the factory to discuss your application parameters.

To Order With Conveyor: Please use the three-digit QC belt code number for conveyor ordering on pages 95 and 99.

M

AA

QUICK SHIP!

M

AB

M

AD

High-Friction Belts

A FA

B FA

D FA

F FA

Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)

AA

A

AA

C

AA

D

AA

E

Heat-Resistant Belts

HA

A

HA

B

HA

D

HA

E

Cut-Resistant Belts

IA

B

IA

C

IA

D

FDA/USDA Belts

UA

A

UA

B

UA

C

UA

D

UA

E

Static Conductive Belts

EA

A

EA

B

EA

C

EA

D

Translucent Belts

A TA
Color Contrasting Belts

B TA

C TA

A PA

B PA

C PA

D PA

E PA

Non-Marking Belts

NA

A

NA

B

NA

C

NA

D

Release Properties Belts

RA

A

RA

B

RA

C

RA

D

RA

E

Specialty/Profile Belts

SA

D

Chemical Resistant Belts Due to the wide variety of chemical and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in these application circumstances. Our application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand not only the chemicals present, but the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach delivers the best possible product for the application.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

101

250 Series Side & Guide Rails
Fixed Side Rails
W + 1.06 W + 1.06 W + .06 .33 * W - .19 .46 *

2.22

2.35

1/3” Side Rails
250-0153 pictured

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Part No. 250-0153To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 250-0153-048 (Center or End Drive Rail)

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with wear strip Part No. 250-0170To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 250-0170-024 (Center or End Drive Rail)

W + 1.19 W + .06 .93 * .78

W + 1.19 W - .19 1.03 * .88

2.81 2.03

2.91 2.03

1” Side Rails
250-0178 pictured

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Part No. 250-0174To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 250-0174-048 (Center or End Drive Rail) W + 1.19 W + .06

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with wear strip Part No. 250-0178To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 250-0178-096 (Center or End Drive Rail) W + 1.19 W - .18

1.93 *

1.78 3.81 2.03

2.05 *

1.90 3.93 2.03

2” Side Rails
250-0215 pictured

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides Part No. 250-0215To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 250-0215-024 (Center or End Drive Rail)

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with wear strip Part No. 250-0216To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 250-0216-060 (Center or End Drive Rail)

Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see page 100 Note 2: All rails are sold in sets Note 3: Side Rails do not run the full length of conveyor. They are indented 1 11/16” from either end Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory

102

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Adjustable Guide Rails
3.00 ADJ. W - .10 MAX. 2.50 MAX. * 1.13 MIN. * 3.00 ADJ. W - .25 MAX.

3.25 MAX. * 1.99 MIN. * 4.34

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX 2” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 250-0282-

2-Axis Adjustable Guides
250-0281-048-T pictured

1” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 250-0281W - .38 MAX.

3.00 ADJ.

5.25 MAX. * 3.00 MIN. * 4.34

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal length of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or a thumb wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for set screw and (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number. Example 250-0281-120 -T 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheel adjustment for a 120” long conveyor The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the product being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and horizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility. Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The thumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal for quick adjustments, because no tools are required.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX. 3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 250-0283-

W + 1.57 W + 1.42 W - 1.21 2.40 MAX. * 2.13 MIN. * 1.62 MAX. * 1.03 MIN. * 3.28 3.94 W - 1.21

Indented Guides
250-0219 pictured

1” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 250-0219-

2” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 250-0218-

W + 1.57 W - 1.31

3.03 * 4.92

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Example 250-0281-120 1” adustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long conveyor

3” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 250-0222-

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100

QC Industries

513.753.6000

103

250 Series Automation Accessories

To Order: LANES LD

S
Construction (S - Standard) Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot) # of Lanes (2,3,4 etc) # of Rails (1, 2, 3, etc) Conveyor Length (in inches) Conveyor Width (in inches) Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)

RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3" RAILS

Lane Dividers

Lane Dividers For part number see box to right

Example LD-2-08144-12FS 2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long conveyor. One rail with two lanes mounted to the conveyor frame

90O Transfer Plate

Inline Transfer Plate

Conveyor Width 2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

Part No. 125-0230-02 125-0230-03 125-0230-04 125-0230-06 125-0230-08 125-0230-10 125-0230-12 125-0230-18 125-0230-24

Conveyor Width 2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

Part No. 125-0220-02 125-0220-03 125-0220-04 125-0220-06 125-0220-08 125-0220-10 125-0220-12 125-0220-18 125-0220-24

Note 1: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction belts. Note 2: Discharge conveyor must be pushing Note 3: Customer to drill screw holes to mount plate

Note: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction belts

Adjustable Stops
To Order: 1. Select an adjustable stop for 1” sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot (See page 102) 2. Using the chart below, fill in the part number using the nominal width of the conveyor for the last two digits of the part number Part No. 1” Sides 2” Sides Single Tee Slot Example: 125-0232-04 End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has 1” aluminum side rails 125-0232-WW 125-0234-WW 125-0233-WW

Adjustable Diverters

Note: The adjustable diverter comes with a 5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2) mounting assemblies that the user can utilize to help orient the product around a 90O transfer.

To Order: Part No. 125-0250-000

104

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Standard Mounts
.22 DIA. .41 1.15 1.32 .13 .38 SLOT 3.50 .31 .34 DIA. .59 .88 1.32

Note: These mounts are intended for surface mounting only. The 250 stands do not require a conveyor mount when ordering stands on pages 106 & 107. W + 1.46 To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

3.06

2.06 * 1.25 W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

.135

Part No. 125-0181-04 (Frame)*

Universal Adjustable Side Mount
125-0181-04 pictured

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

.22 DIA. 1.53 .13 3.10

.34 DIA. .59 .88 .31 3.07 4.81

W + 1.46

5.28 *
1.25

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

Part No. 125-0182-04 (Frame)*

Universal Raised Side Mount
125-0182-04 pictured

.38 SLOT 3.50

.135

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.

.22 .66

1.00

5/16 DIA. THRU HOLE To Order:

1.60 .135 3.00 1.56 W + 1.37 W + 2.00

2.04 * Attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”. Part No. 125-0010-00*

Tee Mount

4.00

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor and mounts the conveyor to a flat surface.

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

.63

5/16-18 SET SCREW .257 DIA. THRU HOLE

11/32 DIA.

2.89 * .43 W - 1.50 W - .75 W + 1.00

1.25 .16

.84

To Order: Attaches directly to the underside of the conveyor frame. To order, use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits. Part No. 125-0011-WW * Example: 125-0011-04* Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wide conveyor
*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Universal Bottom Mount

W + 1.50

Notes: Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface. Cannot be used with high adhesion belts.

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 100-101.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

105

250 Series Stands

NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet

Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands To order:
Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)
WW H1 - H2 06 - 09 09 - 12 12 - 15 15 - 18 18 - 21 21 - 24 24 - 27 27 - 30 30 - 33 H1 - H2 33 - 36 36 - 39 39 - 42 42 - 45 45 - 48 48 - 51 51 - 54 54 - 57 57 - 60 There are three different stand types.

See the next page for table of part numbers

H1 - H2

NOTE: No additional mounts are required. The mounts are included with the stand but are specific to where the stand is attached to the conveyor. See opposing page. NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand framework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimum height range is 12 - 15 inches

Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches)
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24

Aluminum Cross Ties To order:
Cross Ties - Available Lengths Inches 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144” LLL 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144 Part No. 125 - 0235 LLL

Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties. Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to length because of stand placement variations. Example:125-0235-024 To be used in conjunction with the aluminum stands at the top of the page. See opposing page for typical layouts

Casters
To order: Part No. 125-0122-04 Swivel locking caster Order (2) per stand Casters can be added to either aluminum or steel stands. Swivel locking casters increase stand height by 5.50”. Casters should only be used with stands that are 1/3 as wide as they are tall. Casters are not recommended on multi-frame conveyors.

Swivel-In T Nut
To order: Part No. 125-0074-036 (Qty 1) 125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4) The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal for mounting brackets to an aluminum stand, and allows quick mounting location changes. 1/4 - 20 thread in Tee-Nut is provided for attaching accessories

NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, the functionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.

106

QC Industries

513.753.6000

NOTE: The conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the overall height

End Drive Typical Stand Layout
Drive Support Stand Frame Joint Stand

Example: 0182-33-36-12

Example: 0182FJ-33-36-12

Example: 0182DS-33-36-12

Center Drive Typical Stand Layout

Frame Joint Stand

Frame Joint Stand

Example: 0182-33-36-18

Example: 0182FJ-33-36-18

Example: 0182-33-36-18

Aluminum Exact Width Stand
Prefix 018201820182018201820182018201820182018201820182018201820182018201820182H1-H2* 03-06 06-09 09-12 12-15 15-18 18-21 21-24 24-27 27-30 30-33 33-36 36-39 39-42 42-45 45-48 48-51 51-54 54-57 WW** see below¹ see below¹ see below¹ see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below

Frame Joint Stand
Prefix 0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJ0182FJH1-H2* 06-09 09-12 12-15 15-18 18-21 21-24 24-27 27-30 30-33 33-36 36-39 39-42 42-45 45-48 48-51 51-54 54-57 57-60 WW** see below¹ see below¹ see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below

Drive Support Stand
Prefix 0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DS0182DSH1-H2* 12-15 15-18 18-21 21-24 24-27 27-30 30-33 33-36 36-39 39-42 42-45 45-48 48-51 51-54 54-57 57-60 WW** see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below see below

To Order: 1) Choose the height range from the left and enter into H1 & H2 section of the part number 2) Enter the conveyor width into the WW section 3) If the conveyor is over 120” in length, it will be constructed in sections. Those sections are denoted on the conveyor ordering page (pg. 95 or 99). Place a stand at each frame joint. Denote those stands by adding the suffix FJ to the stand part number. 4) End drive 250’s require a stand at the drive. Denote this stand by adding the suffix DS to the stand part number.

Example: 0182DS-27-30-10 ¹Not compatible with the following conveyor widths: 2”, 3”, 4”

57-60 see below 0182Example: 0182-27-30-10 * Conveyor adds 1.89” to the overall height

Example: 0182FJ-27-30-10

**WW (Conveyor Width)
02 03 04 06 08 10 12 18 24

NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, the functionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

107

250 Series Drives
Drive Sizing Technical Data
The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 94 & 98). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)
Enter the equivalent load determined on page 94 or 98. Divide this number by 2. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

1.

2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT)

2.

Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages to write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please note that there are two gearbox types listed; standard and high capacity, for each speed. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.

3. Enter Service Factor (SF)
Use Chart 108-A below, based upon the hours of operation per day as well as starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.

3.

4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT)
Divide the drive train torque (DTT) from #2 by the service factor (SF) from #3. This result equals the supplied drive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.

4.

Service Factor - Chart 108-A 5. Determine Functionality
Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque [SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque [RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT > RCDT. If not, then: A) Slow down the belt speed B) Choose high capacity gearbox C) Choose a wider conveyor D) Consult factory Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to use the remaining drive pages.
Hours of Operation per Day 24 2 16 8 2.1 Service Factor 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Factor

Starts and Stops per Hour

Example: Equivalent load = 150 (per conveyor technical data page) 150 / 2 = 75 (RCDT) 30 FPM (From page 111 - end drive) 169 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) (Standard capacity gearbox) 8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.2) 169 / 1.2 = 140 inch lbs. (SDTT) RCDT = 75 SDTT = 140 140 75 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

Example: Equivalent load = 250 (per conveyor technical data page) 250 / 2 = 125 (RCDT) 100 FPM (From page 113 - center drive) 181 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) (High Capacity Gearbox) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5) 181 / 1.5 = 121 inch lbs. (SDTT) RCDT = 125 SDTT = 121 121 < 125 (Gearmotor assembly will not provide adequate torque)

108

QC Industries

513.753.6000

How to Use the Following Pages
The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner. Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.

Step 1: Step 2 Step 1
250 Series End Drive
End Drive
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - End Drive

Drive Location

Sizing Info

Choose an end or center drive (end drive pages 110 & 111, center drive pages 112 & 113)

Step 2:
Motor Part No.
Conv Sprocket 34 32 34 32 32 34 32 34 32 32 25 30 28 22 28 34 32 32 30 28 28 25 22 22 Prefix 16 16 16 16 25 16 33 25 50 25 50 33 75 33 75 33 75 25 50 33 75 33 75 25 50 33 75 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H Example: 253-15G Gearbox Voltage Ratio Hand 1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D50 40 30 30 30 20 20 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J HP

Sizing Information
FPM* Drive Location 15 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 185 317 186 259 204 321 169 266 144 287 170 359 141 297 170 371 160 349 140 307 86 181 118 257 110 240 71 150 102 224 128 253 120 239 106 210 88 176 83 164 77 153 64 128 57 113 53 106

Mounting Part Number
Prefix Mounting Position* M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 GMtr. Gearbox Belt/Chain Sprocket Size 0or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 25 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 25 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 25 8M 30or 3J 32 8M 30or 3J 28 8M 30or 3J 28 8M 30or 3J 34 8M 30or 3J 30 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 25 8M 30or 3J 28 8M 30or 3J 28 8M 30or 3J 30 8M 30or 3J 32 8M 30or 3J 32 8M 30or 3J 34 8M 3-

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1/6 3.6/1.9 1/6 3.6/1.9 1/6 1/4 1/6 1/3 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 3.6/1.9 4.6/2.6 3.6/1.9 7.2/3.6 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.6/.8 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2/0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 1.7 3.5 2.5 5 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

OB0 / OB3 /

3J
-.04 .78

1G
20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80

Choose mounting arrangement & drive location

A0 A3

10.94

3.64

90 100

Step 3:
Choose a speed

1G

3J
110 115 120 125 150

Step 4:
Run drive sizing calculations listed on page 108

Note: If your application requires a standard capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, or C0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacity gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3 dimensions. Reference these drawings and the table below

1.89

160 180 220 C0 C3 230 250 300 340 13.34 360

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*See drive position chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M2-E3J3-8M3225 (End Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)

Motor Part No. Example: 1H3-05J (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)

Step 5:
Choose standard or high capacity gearbox. Note: Each speed has two rows. The top row is a standard capacity gearbox, and the bottom is a high capacity gearbox. Some speed and gearbox selections will have two different horsepower motors.
250 Series

Motor Dimension Chart
161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1001 1003 100V 1003ID Voltage Key
1 115 VAC 1 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 38 3 230/460 VAC 3 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 38 V 90 VDC w/controller See controller on p. 38 D 90 VDC w/o controller Customer to supply controller

A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76 B0 5.20 B3 6.78 C0 5.82 C3 6.56 4.69 6.78 5.82 6.56 4.98 4.68 5.82 6.56 5.19 5.20 6.19 6.19 5.82 5.82 6.56 6.56 4.99 4.68 5.82 6.56 6.20 6.19 5.82 6.19 5.20 6.19 5.82 6.56 5.01 4.68 5.82 6.56 6.15 6.15 5.82 6.56 6.19 4.98 6.19 4.98 5.82 5.82 7.23 7.23 5.82 6.56 7.19 5.82 6.56 6.19 6.13 6.76 5.82 6.56 7.19 5.82 6.56 7.19 6.13 5.82 5.82 6.56 6.56 8.18 5.82 6.56 Notes:

5.82 5.82 6.56 6.56

6.56 6.56

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number. 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

See Drive Accessories pages (p. 114) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

110

QC Industries

513.753.6000

QC Industries

513.753.6000

111

Step 6
Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - End Drive

Step 3

Sizing Information
FPM* 15 20 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 185 317 186 259 204 321 169 266 144 287 170 359 141 297 170 371 160 349 140 307 86 181 118 257 110 240 71 150 102 224 128 253 120

Mounting Part Number
Prefix Mounting Position* M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2M2E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G 1G G Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 GMtr. Gearbox Belt/Chain Sprocket Size 08M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 25 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 25 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 25 308M or 3J 32 308M or 3J 28 308M or 3J 28 308M or 3J 34 308M or 3J 30 308M or 3J 22 30Conv Sprocket 34 32 34 32 32 34 32 34 32 32 25 30 28 22 28 34 Prefix 16 16 16 16 25 16 33 25 50 25 50 33 75 33 75 33 75 25 50 33 75 33 75 25 50 33 75 50 1H 50

Motor Part No.
Example: 253-15G Gearbox Voltage Ratio Hand 1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1 3 V D50 40 30 30 30 20 20 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 05 05 05 G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J HP

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6 1/6 3.6/1.9 1/6 3.6/1.9 1/6 1/4 1/6 1/3 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 1 1/2 3.6/1.9 4.6/2.6 3.6/1.9 7.2/3.6 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8 8/4 4 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.6/.8 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2 0/1 0 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 2.5 1.7 3.5 2.5 5 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 5 10 5 Face 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C

Step 6:
Choose voltage requirements Voltage

Speed

25 30 40 50 60 75 80 90 100

Step 7:
Put together two part numbers, motor mounting package and motor by following from left to right

Step 5

110 115 120 125 150

Voltage Key
1 115VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller 3 V D

Torque

QC Industries

513.753.6000

109

250 Series End Drive
End Drive

B0 DIA. B3 DIA. Drive Location

3J

1G

D0 D3 A0 A3

10.94

1G
3.64

3J

Note: If your application requires a standard capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, C0, and D0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacity gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3, and D3 dimensions. Reference these drawings and the table below

1.89 *

C0 C3

7.83

13.34

Motor Dimension Chart
161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1H1 1H3 1HV 1H3ID A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76 B0 5.20 B3 6.78 C0 5.82 C3 6.56 D0 D3 0 .78 4.69 6.78 5.82 6.56 0 .78 4.98 4.68 5.82 6.56 0 .78 5.19 5.20 6.19 6.19 5.82 5.82 6.56 6.56 0 .78 0 .78 4.99 4.68 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.20 6.19 5.82 6.19 0 .78 5.20 6.19 5.82 6.56 0 .78 5.01 4.68 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.15 6.15 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.19 4.98 6.19 4.98 5.82 5.82 7.23 7.23 5.82 6.56 0 .78 7.19 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.19 6.13 6.76 5.82 6.56 0 .78 7.19 5.82 6.56 0 .78 7.19 6.13 5.82 5.82 6.56 6.56 0 .78 0 .78 8.18 5.82 6.56 0 .78

5.82 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.56 0 .78

6.56 6.56 0 .78 0 .78

110

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - 250 Drive

Sizing Information
FPM* 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 90 100 110 115 120 125 150 160 180 220 230 250 300 340 360 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 185 317 186 259 204 321 169 266 144 287 170 359 141 297 170 371 160 349 140 307 86 181 118 257 110 240 71 150 102 224 128 253 120 239 106 210 88 176 83 164 77 153 64 128 57 113 53 106

Mounting Part Number
Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 GMtr. Gearbox Belt Mounting Position* Size Prefix Sprocket 08M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 34 C M2308M 1G or 3J 30 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 30 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 34 C M23*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No.
Conv Sprocket 34 32 34 32 32 34 32 34 32 32 25 30 28 22 28 34 32 32 30 28 28 25 22 22 Example: 253-15G Gearbox Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand 1,3,V, DG or J 50 16 50 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, DG or J 40 16 1,3,V, D16 1,3,V, D40 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, DG or J 30 16 1,3,V, D30 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, D30 G or J 25 1,3,V, D30 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, D20 G or J 33 1,3,V, D20 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 HP 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/6 1/3 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 Amp 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 7.4/3.7 3.6/1.9 5.2/2.8 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 230/460 Amp 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 2.1/1.0 1.3/0.6 1.5/0.7 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 4.8 1.7 3.2 4.8 5 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 Face 42 56 42 56 42 56 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Mounting Part Number Example: M2-C3J3-8M3225 (250 Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)

Motor Part No. Example: 1H3-05J3 (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)

Voltage Key
1 3 V D 115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller For optional AC controls, see p. 114 For optional AC controls, see p. 114 See controller on p. 114 Customer to supply controller

Notes:

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon running torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number. 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

See Drive Accessories (pages 114-115) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

QC Industries

513.753.6000

111

250 Series Center Drive

Center Drive

B0 DIA. B3 DIA. Drive Location D0 D3

A0 A3

1G

3J

10.94

3.64

Note: If your application requires a standard capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, C0, and D0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacity gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3, and D3 dimensions. Reference these drawings and the table below

1.89 *

C0 C3

7.83

13.34

Motor Dimension Chart
161 163 16V 251 253 25V 331 333 33V 501 503 50V 503ID 751 753 75V 753ID 1H1 1H3 1HV 1H3ID A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76 B0 5.20 B3 6.78 C0 5.82 C3 6.56 D0 D3 0 .78 4.69 6.78 5.82 6.56 0 .78 4.98 4.68 5.82 6.56 0 .78 5.19 5.20 6.19 6.19 5.82 5.82 6.56 6.56 0 .78 0 .78 4.99 4.68 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.20 6.19 5.82 6.19 0 .78 5.20 6.19 5.82 6.56 0 .78 5.01 4.68 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.15 6.15 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.19 4.98 6.19 4.98 5.82 5.82 7.23 7.23 5.82 6.56 0 .78 7.19 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.19 6.13 6.76 5.82 6.56 0 .78 7.19 5.82 6.56 0 .78 7.19 6.13 5.82 5.82 6.56 6.56 0 .78 0 .78 8.18 5.82 6.56 0 .78

5.82 5.82 6.56 0 .78 6.56 0 .78

6.56 6.56 0 .78 0 .78

112

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - 250 Drive

Sizing Information
FPM* 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 90 100 110 115 120 125 150 160 180 220 230 250 300 340 360 Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 185 317 186 259 204 321 169 266 144 287 170 359 141 297 170 371 160 349 140 307 86 181 118 257 110 240 71 150 102 224 128 253 120 239 106 210 88 176 83 164 77 153 64 128 57 113 53 106

Mounting Part Number
Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 GMtr. Gearbox Belt Prefix Mounting Position* Size Sprocket 08M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 34 C M2308M 1G or 3J 30 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 30 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 34 C M23*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No.
Conv Sprocket 34 32 34 32 32 34 32 34 32 32 25 30 28 22 28 34 32 32 30 28 28 25 22 22 Example: 253-15G Gearbox Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand 1,3,V, DG or J 50 16 50 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, DG or J 40 16 1,3,V, D16 1,3,V, D40 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, DG or J 30 16 1,3,V, D30 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, D30 G or J 25 1,3,V, D30 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, D20 G or J 33 1,3,V, D20 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 HP 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/6 1/3 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1

Motor Information
Voltage 115/230 Amp 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 7.4/3.7 3.6/1.9 5.2/2.8 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 230/460 Amp 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/0.6 2.1/1.0 1.3/0.6 1.5/0.7 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 4.8 1.7 3.2 4.8 5 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 Face 42 56 42 56 42 56 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Mounting Part Number Example: M2-C3J3-8M3225 (250 Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)

Motor Part No. Example: 1H3-05J3 (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)

Voltage Key
1 3 V D 115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller For optional AC controls, see p. 114 For optional AC controls, see p. 114 See controller on p. 114 Customer to supply controller

Notes:

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon running torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number. 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

See Drive Accessories (pages 114-115) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

QC Industries

513.753.6000

113

250 Series Drive Accessories
Motor Controls
6.00 5.00 3X .19 DIA. 115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1/2 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 1 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 1 Enclosure Forward/Reverse switch, Run/Brake switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-01 125-0149-09* Specifications/Features:

8.00

5.00

3.45

1.25

Standard NEMA 1DC Control Wiring: cords & plugs

Standard DC Control
2X .88 DIA. 2.50 Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

*Includes 8’ cord from control to AC plug and 8’ cord from control to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).

2.84 2.40

4.45

Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1/3 phase, 50/60 hz input, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc/CE IP 20 Enclosure 3-digit LED display Forward/Reverse switch Run/Stop button, Accel/Decel buttons Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number:* 125-0054-5C-11-05 125-0054-5C-21-05 125-0054-5C-23-20 125-0054-5C-43-10

4.57

5.73

5.13

4X .18 DIA.

.34

115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20

Standard AC Control
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63 Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Forward/Off/Reverse switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38

.19 7.20 6.35 .85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

NEMA 4X DC Control

Washdown DC Control

2.20

1.20

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63 Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Run/Stop switch Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-37

.19 7.20 6.35 .85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

NEMA 4X AC Control

Washdown AC Control

2.20

1.20

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

114

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Motion Controls
.25 DIA. 3.63 The Motor Starter is an overload protection that also provides a means of using a Remote E-Stop for safety. The starter is equipped with an undervoltage trip to protect against autostarting after the overload condition has been corrected. Also includes short circuit protection. Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max 230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max 460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max UL/CSA/CE Start/Stop buttons IP55 Enclosure To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38-115 125-0054-38-230 125-0054-38-460

5.13

5.75

2.00 .72

4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT

Motor Starter
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure

TURN TO RELEASE E-STOP 2.50 3.13

The E-Stop accessory is mounted directly to the Motor Starter enclosure, providing a means of stopping the motor for safety. It can be padlocked for servicing, and contains a start button for restarting the motor after the pushbutton has been released. Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE E-Stop can be locked out/includes start button IP55 Rated Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure

2.25

5.88

LOCK-OUT TAG-OUT To Order: Part Number: ELECT-061 E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter

E-Stop Accessory
Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

3.50 2X .22 DIA. 3.00

The Remote E-Stop provides a means for locking out power to the motor for safety. It includes an IP65 enclosure and mounting bracket to allow the E-Stop to be mounted directly to the side of the conveyor frame. Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE IP65 Enclosure To Order: Part Number: ELECT-063-WBRKT

2.67

2.89

2.37 3.76

2.75

E-Stop with enclosure

Remote E-Stop

Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frame Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches

Heavy Duty Motor Options
Part Number 125-0149-05 125-0149-06 125-0149-07 125-0149-09 Description ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor 8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor 8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details

QC Industries

513.753.6000

115

125 Series Application Assistance Form
Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record the part numbers. This sheet can be used to document your application and request a quotation.
2 1

QC Industries 4057 Clough Woods Dr. Batavia, OH 45103 513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001 www.qcindustries.com Record your part numbers here:
1

5 3 4 6

2 3 4 5

7

6 7

Conveyor Side/Guide Rails Mounts Stands/CrossTies Gearmotor Mounting Gearmotor Controllers/Drives

Application Details

Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself: Part Dimensions: Concentrated Uniformly Distributed Equivalent Load Chemical Consideration FDA Consideration USDA Consideration Static Electricity Consideration W L H Side Loading Accumulating

Part Description Load Information Part Weight Max Load Environment Information Environment Description

Application Notes

Contact Information Company Address City, State, Zip
1

Area to sketch ideas/layouts

Contact Phone Fax

Conveyor Details

Step 1
Choose from the options in the catalog (pages 11, 15, 19, 47, or 51). *Application hint: If you have an FDA consideration, you will want to choose a corrosion resistant construction with a stainless steel frame.
1 2 3 4

Step 2
Choose the width and length (in inches) you require. Please figure the equivalent load on the conveyor to ensure you have correctly sized a conveyor for the application. Record your equivalent load here.
Belt Tail Drive Pulley Drive Location Length (in inches) Width (in inches) Frame Style (H= Straight) Frame Type (See page 11, 15, or 19) Construction (S=Standard, R=Corrosion Resistant) Drive Type (E=End Drive) Series (1=125)

Step 3
Choose from the options in the catalog (pages 11, 15, 19, 47, or 51). *Application hint: Gang driven applications require different drive pulleys. Reference page 41 for details. Different tail pulleys are described on pages 42 and 43.

Step 4
Choose a belt from page 15, 20-21, 51, or 52-53. Record your part number above.

1

QC Industries

513.753.6000

2

Side/Guide Rails
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose from the options listed on pages 22-25 and 54-57. *Application hint: Adjustable guide rails have an extra digit at the end of the part number (see page 23).

125
Conveyor Length (in inches) Side/Guide Identifier Prefix

Step 2
Choose the rail or guide identifier from pages 22-24 or 54-57.

Step 3
Enter the nominal length of the conveyor in these three positions. Note: Some product containment/lane divider/hopper part numbers have slightly different part number legends. Please refer to those pages for the correct part number. Record your part number on previous page. 3

Conveyor Mounts
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose from the options listed on pages 26-27, and 58. *Application hint: Mounts are used to attach conveyors to stands and other surfaces. Some mounts will not work with certain belting or conveyor configurations. Check the Notes area to ensure compatibility.

125
Mount Specific Suffix Mount Identifier Prefix

Step 2
Enter the two digit suffix for the mount you have chosen. This suffix could be a designator of how it is mounted or a conveyor width.

Step 3
Enter mount specific suffix. Record your part number on previous page. 4

Stands
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose from the options listed on pages 28, 29, and 59. *Application hint: Choose between aluminum, powder coated steel, or stainless steel stands. Note that powder coated steel stands extend wider than conveyor width.

Step 2
Choose the upper and lower stand height ranges. Reference pages 28-29 and 59.

Stand Width Upper height range Lower height range Stand Identifier

Step 3
Choose the stand width. Reference pages 28-29 and 59. Note: QC recommends cross ties (see pages 28-29) for all applications. Additionally we recommend that the stands be bolted to the floor. Record your part number on previous page. 5

Gearmotor Mounting
1 2 3 4

Step 1
Enter M1 in the first two digits.

Step 2
Refer to page 31 and 61 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose top, bottom, side, or remote, and drive position.
Sprocket/pulley combinations Belt/chain identifier Gear reducer size & handing Motor mounting position & type Series (1=125) Mounting (M=Mounting)

Step 3
Refer to pages 33, 35, 37, 63, or 65 to choose reducer type and handing.

Step 4
If this is a top or bottom drive, choose belt or chain, then fill in the pulley/sprocket combinations (page 33, 35, 37, 63, or 65) Record your part number on previous page. 6

Gearmotor
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 31 or 61.

Step 2
Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: If choosing a heavy duty motor, choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller. Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold separately.
Gear reducer ratio Voltage Horsepower

Step 3
Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections. Record your part number on previous page.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

2

125 Z Series Application Assistance Form
Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record the part numbers. This sheet can be used to document your application and request a quotation.
2 1

QC Industries 4057 Clough Woods Dr. Batavia, OH 45103 513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001 www.qcindustries.com Record your part numbers here:

5

1 2

6

3

3 4

7

4

5 6 7

Conveyor Guide Rails Flared Rails / Hopper Stands/CrossTies Gearmotor Mounting Gearmotor Controllers/Drives

Application Details

Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself: Part Dimensions: Concentrated Uniformly Distributed Equivalent Load W L H Side Loading Accumulating

Part Description Load Information Part Weight Max Load Environment Information Environment Description

Application Notes Dimensions
Record all the known dimensions of the application in the boxes to the right. For a ‘U’ or ‘N’ application please contact the factory.
Denote ‘Z’ Conveyor Application Here Denote ‘L’ Conveyor Application Here Denote ‘R’ Conveyor Application Here

Contact Information Company Address City, State, Zip
1

Contact Phone Fax

Conveyor Details

Step 1
Choose from the options in the catalog (page 80). *Application hint: Please follow the instructions on page 78 and build the application and part number from pages 78 through 81.
1 2 3 4 5

Step 2
Choose the width, length, and angle your application requires. *Application hint: Each configuration (Z, L, or R) has different length sections. The angle is always denoted after the first frame section. Ex 024B036
Belt Tail Drive Pulley Drive Location Length and angle Width (in inches) Frame Style (Z,L, or R) Frame Type (See page 80) Construction (S=Standard) Drive Type (E=End Drive) Series (1=125) Cleats

Step 3
Choose from the options in the catalog (page 81).

Step 4
Choose a belt from page 81. *Application hint: Cleat width and useable belt width is determined by the rail systems chosen; a corrugated sidewall (rail built into the belt) or a guide rail.

Step 5
Determine the number of cleats along the belt (page 81) Record your part number above.

1

QC Industries

513.753.6000

2

Guide Rails
1 2 3

Note:
Fill in this part number only when using an adjustable guide rail (page 82) instead of a corrugated sidewall belt. Otherwise, skip this step. *Application hint: Adjustable guide rails leave a clearance between the bottom of the rail and the belt. If carrying small parts consider a corrugated sidewall belt.

Z

028
C Frame

Step 1
Enter the series and guide rail designator as shown.

A Frame B Frame Angle Side/Guide Identifier Prefix

Step 2
Enter the angle (B,C,D,E, or F).

Step 3
Enter the frame section lengths (in inches) for sections a, b, and c (c option for Z configurations). 3

Flared Rails / Hopper
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose from the options listed on page 83. *Application hint: Combine the flared side rails and end stops together for a hopper. See bottom of page 83.

Z

Step 2
Choose a flared side rail (1004) and/or one or two end stops (0234).

1004 0234
Rail Specific Suffix Rail Identifier Stop Specific Suffix End Stop Identifier

Step 3
Enter the three digit length for the flared rail (make sure it is 6” smaller than the a section). Enter the two digit width for the end stop. Record your part number on previous page. 4

Prefix

Stands
1 2 3 4

Step 1
Enter the prefix number as shown. *Application hint: If you application requires an infeed height of 9” or less choose from the stands on page 84, otherwise reference page 85)

223
Stand Width Upper height range Lower height range Caster or Foot Stand Identifier

Step 2
Choose a caster or foot type stand.

Step 3
Choose the top of belt height range for your application. Use the information from pages 84 - 85 in choosing your stands. Reference pages 84 - 85 in choosing the standard height ranges.

Step 4
Choose the width of your conveyor. Note: low range stands do not require this designation. We recommend that the stands be bolted to the floor. Record your part number on previous page. 5

Gearmotor Mounting
1 2 3 4

Step 1
Enter M1 in the first two digits.

Step 2
Refer to page 87 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose top, bottom, side, or remote, and drive position.
Sprocket/pulley combinations Belt/chain identifier Gear reducer size & handing Motor mounting position & type Series (1=125) Mounting (M=Mounting)

Step 3
Refer to page 89 to choose reducer type and hand.

Step 4
If this is a top or bottom drive, choose belt or chain, then fill in the pulley/sprocket combinations (page 89). Record your part number on previous page. 6

Gearmotor
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 87.

Step 2
Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: Choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller. Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold seperately.

Gear reducer ratio Voltage Horsepower

Step 3
Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections. Record your part number on previous page.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

2

250 Series Application Assistance Form
Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record the part numbers. This sheet can be used to document your application and request a quotation.
2 1

QC Industries 4057 Clough Woods Dr. Batavia, OH 45103 513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001 www.qcindustries.com Record your part numbers here:
1 2

5 6 3 7 4

3 4 5 6 7 For surface mounting

Conveyor Guide Rails Mounts Stands / Cross Ties Gearmotor Mounting Gearmotor Controllers / Drives

Application Details

Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself: Part Dimensions: Concentrated Uniformly Distributed Equivalent Load Chemical Consideration FDA Consideration USDA Consideration Static Electricity Consideration W L H Side Loading Accumulating

Part Description Load Information Part Weight Max Load Environment Information Environment Description

Application Notes

Area to sketch ideas/layouts

Contact Information Company Address City, State, Zip
1

Contact Phone Fax

Conveyor Details

Step 1
Choose from the options in the catalog (page 95 or 99). *Application hint: Center drives offer longer conveyor lengths.
1 2 3 4

Step 2
Choose the width and length your application requires. *Application hint: Conveyor lengths 120” and uder are made from one frame. Those over 120” are made with multiple frames. The center drive has a nominal 48” drive frame section while the end drive has a nominal 36” drive frame section. Reference drawings on pages 92 and 96 for details Note: Center drive conveyors have the drive pulley located in the center of the conveyor length. For other drive locations options contact the factory.

Belt Tail Drive Pulley Drive Location Length (in inches) Width (in inches) Frame Style (H= Horizontal) Frame Type (See page 95 or 99) Construction (S=Standard) Drive Type (E=End Drive or C= Center Drive) Series (2=250)

Step 3
Choose from the options in the catalog (page 95 or 99).

Step 4
Choose a belt from pages 100-101. *Application hint: Some longer conveyor applications may require the belt to be mechanically spliced. Consult the factory for details. Record your part number above.

1

QC Industries

513.753.6000

2

Side/Guide Rails
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose from the options listed on pages 102-104.

Step 2
Choose the identifier from pages 102-103.

250
Conveyor Length or frame length (in inches) Side/Guide Identifier

Step 3
Enter the nominal length of the conveyor or the frame section. *Application hint: The bolt on extrusions are slightly shorter than the actual frame length. Record your part number on previous page. 3

Prefix

Conveyor Mounts
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose from the options listed on page 105. *Application hint: Mounts for the 250 Series are used for surface mounting only. They are not needed if using the stands listed on pages 106-107.

125
Mount Specific Suffix Mount Identifier Prefix

Step 2
Enter the two digit suffix for the mount you have chosen. This suffix could be a designator of how it is mounted or a conveyor width.

Step 3
Enter mount specific suffix Record your part number on previous page. 4

Stands
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose from the options listed on pages 106-107. *Application hint: Reference the drawings on page 107 for typical stand layouts and part numbers. Certain stands require a two digit stand style to be added to the four digit prefix.

0182
Stand Width Upper height range Lower height range

Step 2
Choose the upper and lower stand height ranges. Reference pages 28-29 and 59.
Stand Style Stand Identifier

Step 3
Choose the stand width. Reference page 107 Note: QC recommends cross ties (see page 106) for all applications. Additionally, we recommend that the stands be bolted to the floor. Record your part number on previous page. 5

Gearmotor Mounting
1 2 3 4

Step 1
Enter M2 in the first two digits. *Application hint: There are two different capacity gearboxes to choose from (standard or high) Refer to sizing instructions on page 108.

M2

C

8M
Sprocket combinations

Step 2
Refer to page 108-109 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose an end or center drive and which side of the conveyor the drive will be attached. *Application hint: Both center and end drives use a ‘C’ designator.
Belt identifier Gear reducer size & handing Motor mounting position & type Series (2=250) Mounting (M=Mounting)

Step 3
Refer to pages 110 or 112 to choose reducer type and hand. If using a high capacity gearbox you will enter a ‘3’ into the shaded box shown in the legend to the right.

Step 4
Choose the belt identifier and enter the sprocket ratios as listed on page 111 or 113. Record your part number on previous page. 6

Gearmotor
1 2 3

Step 1
Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 108. Note that some applications require a high capacity gearbox which will require a different horsepower motor be chosen

Step 2
Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: Choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller. Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold seperately (pg 114).

Gear reducer ratio Voltage Horsepower

Step 3
Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections. If using a high capacity gearbox you will enter a ‘3’ into the shaded box shown in the legend to the right. Record your part number on previous page.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

2

Warranty & RGA
QC INDUSTRIES CONVEYOR WARRANTY
QC INDUSTRIES warrants that our conveyors are free from defects in materials and workmanship and fit for the ordinary purposes for which such goods are used, under normal installation, use and service for one (1) year from date of purchase or 2100 hours of running use, whichever is sooner. QC INDUSTRIES will replace any defective part within the warranty period, without charge, provided: 1. The Purchaser gives QC INDUSTRIES prompt written notice of the defect, including the date of purchase and original purchase order number. 2. The Purchaser will then be given a return goods authorization number (RGA #) which must be displayed on all labels and packing slips returned with merchandise. (See RGA section) 3. The Purchaser pays for delivery of the defective part to QC Industries for inspection and verification of the defect. 4. The Purchaser shall pay all shipping and insurance charges for the replacement part from QC INDUSTRIES and the cost of installing the replacement part. This warranty is limited to the replacement of defective parts. QC INDUSTRIES WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY ANY DEFECT IN THIS UNIT. This warranty shall not apply if any failure of this unit or its parts is caused by unreasonable use, lack of maintenance, improper maintenance and/or repairs, incorrect adjustments, exposure to corrosive or abrasive material, moisture causing damage, or any modification or alteration affecting the operation of the unit which is not authorized by QC INDUSTRIES in writing. This warranty shall not apply to the following items that are covered by their manufacturer's warranty, subject to any limitation contained in those warranties. (A) Bearings (B) Motors (C) Reducers (D) Controllers (E) Casters (F) Belts (unless otherwise agreed to in writing)

CAUTION: Any attempt to repair such items may actually void the manufacturer's warranty. Any description of this unit is only to identify it and it not a warranty that the unit fits the description. Only an official of QC INDUSTRIES may make any warranties for QC INDUSTRIES. Any warranties implied by law are limited in duration to the one (1) year term of this warranty. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH HEREIN, QC INDUSTRIES MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY FOR FITNESS OR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LOST OR DAMAGED GOODS: PLEASE READ THESE IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Shipments should be inspected immediately upon receipt for lost or damaged goods. Any loss or damage should be noted on the carriers receipt (or bill of lading) at the time of acceptance. If items are perceived to be lost or damaged after the shipment has been accepted, it becomes more difficult to file a claim with the carrier if the receipt does not indicate such loss or damage. Do not, at any time, request the carrier to return any items or shipment to QC Industries without previous authorization from our company for such a return. Please notify QC Industries as soon as any loss or damage is discovered and request the department that handles the lost or damaged goods. You will need to know a complete description of all lost or damaged items. If replacement items are needed, a purchase order made out to QC Industries will need to be supplied. QC Industries will then contact the carrier's local agent and request that an inspection of the items be performed. This is absolutely necessary. Unless an inspection is performed, the carrier will not entertain any claim for loss or damage. After the inspection has been completed, the carrier will notify QC Industries. If the carrier takes responsibility for the claim, a credit will be issued to you for the replacement item(s), including freight charges from QC Industries, where applicable. If the carrier does not take responsibility for the claim, a representative of QC Industries will contact you.

RETURNED GOODS AUTHORIZATION AND ORDER CANCELLATION REVISION POLICY
If, for any reason, an item needs to be returned to QC Industries or an in-house order needs to be cancelled or revised, the Purchaser is required to adhere to the following series of steps to ensure that the return or cancellation is handled in the proper manner. RGA POLICY/INSTRUCTIONS 1. Promptly call QC Industries at (513) 753-6000 and request the department that handles Returned Goods Authorization. At this time, you will be asked to answer pertinent questions relating to the returned items. We ask that you have the following information ready: • Name of distributor (if applicable) through which item(s) were purchased. • Name of the Customer and/or end user of the item(s). • Any/all purchase order numbers related to the item(s) in question. • Phone number and names of contacts involved in the return (as it may become necessary that they be contacted later). • Complete part numbers of all items involved in the return. • Complete description as the reason for the return and the actions that need to be taken. (If the item is to be replaced, a new purchase order number must be supplied by the Purchaser along with complete shipping and billing instructions. These replacements will be treated as separate orders by QC Industries and evaluated for possible credit only after returned items are received and evaluated.) 2. After the call has been made to QC Industries, we will process your RGA and you will be faxed the RGA number to use for returning the item(s). RGA numbers will not be given verbally over the phone. 3. Upon receipt of your RGA, you are required to return the item(s) within 30 days of receipt of said authorization. After 30 days, the Return Authorization will be void if item(s) have not been received by QC Industries. All shipping charges and freight insurance charges of returned goods will the responsibility of the Purchaser. 4. The RGA number must be clearly marked on the outside of all packages. It must also be on any paperwork, packing slips, or delivery receipts. If there is no RGA number visible on the package, the package may be refused and sent back at the Purchaser's expense. 5. After receipt of returned goods, QC Industries will evaluate the item(s) for credit and take the appropriate action based on each situation. Standard items are returned in new, resalable condition, will be credited for the amount of the purchase less 20%. Full credit will only be issued on items that are considered to be defective at the time of shipment from QC Industries and are evaluated to be under warranty. Please allow 30 days for credits to be issued. ORDER CANCELLATION/REVISION POLICY If it becomes necessary to cancel or revise an order prior to the order being shipped, QC Industries reserves the right to evaluate each order that is to be cancelled or revised and determine if any charges are applicable. A 20% Restocking Charge will apply if an order is assembled and ready to ship prior to its cancellation or revision and the order is totally comprised of standard stock items. If the order contains other than stock items, an evaluation will be made based on the status of the order. Additional charges will be included with the 20% Restocking Charge if any of the following conditions are met: 1. The order contains any items that are considered to be non-stock items and these items have already been produced by QC Industries or one of its suppliers. 2. The order contains any items that require special handling or assembly and these processes have been completed. 3. The Customer has specified that they will pick up an order from QC's facility by a predetermined time and that time frame has expired. In this case, QC will make an attempt to notify the Customer. If this cannot be accomplished in a reasonable time, the order will be disassembled and the Customer will be charged a restocking fee and any additional charges based on the order's contents as explained herein.

122

QC Industries

513.753.6000

QC Industries

LLC

Conveyor Selection Guide
This Guide is intended to provide a general reference as to the most common application use. For assistance contact our application specialists.

Accumulation Assembly Automotive Bar Code Scanning Bulk Product Clean Room Operations Cosmetics Curing Diverting Electronic Component Automation Food Processing High Temperature Applications Incline/Decline Operations Ink Jet Printing Inspection Labeling Machine Integration Material Handling Medical Metal Stamping Packaging Palletized Operations Parts Separation Part and Scrap Removal Pharmaceutical Plastics Molding Robotic Integration Scanning Weighing Workcells

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

125

ies Ser Stand ies ard 125 Ser Magn etic ies 125 Cle Ser ate ies d 125 Cor ZS rosi on 250 eries Ang Resista Ser nt led ies Fr Sta nda ame rd

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

125

Ser

QC Industries

513.753.6000

123